HomeMy WebLinkAboutConnectivity ProjectCORNELL UNIVERSITY
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM (NCP)
PHASE 2C
SPECIFICATIONS
MEP ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECT
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
64 SOUTH STREET
AUBURN, NY 13021
TEL: (315) 2537301
FAX: (315) 2537306
June 29, 2012
TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANTS
ARCHIT ECHNOLOGY
115 Metro Park
Rochester, NY 14623
Tel: (585) 424&1952
Fax: (585) 424&4239
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052601
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM
(TR) BONDING AND GROUND
DETAIL
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052801
TYPICAL WIRELESS ACCESS
POINT - RECESSED
INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052802
TYPICAL WIRELESS ACCESS
POINT - SURFACE
INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052803
TYPICAL WALL OUTLET
INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052804
TYPICAL SR-2 SURFACE
RACEWAY INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052805
TYPICAL WALL MOUNTED
TELEPHONE OUTLET
INSTALLATION (SR-2 OR
RECESSED CONDUIT)
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052806
TYPICAL FIRE ALARM PANEL
CONNECTION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052807
TYPICAL OUTLET PATHWAY /
CONNECTION TYPE DETAIL
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052808
SECONDARY PATHWAY - NEW
PULLBOX SIZING /
CONNECTION DETAILS
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052809
WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY -
SECONDARY CONDUIT
INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27052810
WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY -
MAJOR HORIZONTAL
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27055301
SINGLE GANG FACEPLATE
DETAIL - VERTICAL
INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27055302
SINGLE GANG FACEPLATE
DETAIL - HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27055303
DOUBLE GANG FACEPLATE
DETAIL
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27055304
TYPICAL PATCH PANEL
LABELING
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27110001
CABLE RUNWAY LAYOUT /
INSTALLATION DETAIL #1
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27110002
CABLE RUNWAY LAYOUT /
INSTALLATION DETAIL #2
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27134301
SPECIAL CIRCUITS
CROSSOVER DETAIL
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-27150001
CABLE INSTALLATION DETAIL
AT WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY
AND PERPENDICULAR
CONDUIT INTERSECTION
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-28130002
CARD ACCESS DETAIL - NEW
SINGLE DOOR/FRAME
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-28130003
CARD ACCESS DETAIL - NEW
DOUBLE DOOR/FRAME
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-28130004
CARD ACCESS DETAIL -
EXISTING SINGLE
DOOR/FRAME
AT STANDARD DETAILS
Fax: 585.424.4239
115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623
www.archi-technology.com
PHONE: 585.424.1952
ISSUE DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
CU-28130005
CARD ACCESS DETAIL -
EXISTING DOUBLE
DOOR/FRAME
AT STANDARD DETAILS
PROJECT SITE PLANCORNELL UNIVERSITYNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: July 6, 2012 PLOT BY: pbarrie
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T-COVER.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBDRAWING INDEXAND PROJECT SITEPLANT-COVERPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTDRAWING INDEXDRAWINGDESCRIPTIONT-COVERDRAWING INDEX AND PROJECT SITE PLANT-GENSTANDARD SYMBOLS. NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS (T-SERIES)T1T1-SZTR SERVING ZONES, PLAN VIEWS AND BLDG. SECTION VIEWT1-PLPATHWAYS LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMST1-CLCOPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMST1-FLFIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMST2: BRADFIELD - 1028BT2-SB_B.CA_CPBRADFIELD SUB-BASEMENT AND BASEMENT PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-G_1.CA_CPBRADFIELD GROUND AND FIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-2_3.CA_CPBRADFIELD SECOND AND THIRD FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-4_5.CA_CPBRADFIELD FOURTH AND FIFTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-6_7.CA_CPBRADFIELD SIXTH AND SEVENTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-8_9.CA_CPBRADFIELD EIGHTH AND NINTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-10_11.CA_CPBRADFIELD TENTH AND ELEVENTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-12.CA_CPBRADFIELD TWELFTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2: EMERSON - 1028ET2-GN.CA_CPEMERSON GROUND FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-1N.CA_CPEMERSON FIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-2N.CA_CPEMERSON SECOND FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-3N.CA_CPEMERSON THIRD FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT2-4N.CA_CPEMERSON FOURTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLINGT3T3-GAMTR-GA ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONST3-3AITR-3A ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONST3-6AITR-6A ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONST3-9AITR-9A ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONST3-GBMTR-GB ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONST3-2BITR-2B ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONSAMEPAMEP-GENGENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (AMEP SERIES)T1-AMEPAMEP-AREAS OF WORKAMEP-GAMTR-GA PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTESAMEP-3AITR-3A PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTESAMEP-6AITR-6A PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTESAMEP-9AITR-9A PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTESAMEP-GBMTR-GB PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTESA4ARCHITECTURAL DETAILSM4MECHANICAL DETAILSE4ELECTRICAL DETAILS
CEILING SCHEDULEGENERAL PROJECT NOTESGENERAL REMOVAL NOTESGENERAL DRAWING NOTES-EXISTING CONDITIONS/REMOVALS-ACCESS CONTROL SYMBOLS LEGENDGENERAL NEW WORK NOTESGENERAL DRAWING NOTES-HORIZONTAL CABLING-GENERAL DRAWING NOTES-PATHWAYS-GENERAL DRAWING NOTES-PATHWAYS-ABBREVIATIONS TELECOM SYMBOLS LEGEND (REV. 02/12)NEW / EXISTING OUTLET SUBSCRIPT KEYNEW PATHWAY TYPE KEYOUTLET DESCRIPTOR KEYEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEYCABLING SYMBOLS LEGENDDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBSTANDARDSYMBOLS. NOTES,ABBREVIATIONS(T-SERIES)T-GENPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT3$7+:$<6&+('8/(1(::25.&$%/(),//%$6('21&$%/(2'¸ 0.24DESIGNATIONDESCRIPTIONMANUFACTURERPART NO.APPROXIMATEOUTSIDEDIMENSIONAPPROXIMATEINSIDEDIMENSIONCABLE FILL&$3$&,7<¸MIN. BENDRADIUS&ʵCONDUITSEE SPEC. SECTION 27 05 28.75" DIA.44.5"1" C1" DIA.76"1.25" C1.25" DIA.137.5"1.5" C1.5" DIA.189"2" C2" DIA.2912"2.5" C2.5" DIA.5125"3" C3" DIA.7830"4" C4" DIA.13040"SR-1NOT USEDSR-2 **SURFACE RACEWAYSEE SPEC. SECTION27 05 282400 SERIESSEE SPEC. SECTION 27 05 2812SR-3 **SURFACE RACEWAY3000 SERIES32SR-4 **SURFACE RACEWAY4000 SERIES63SR-4D **SURFACE RACEWAY(DIVIDED)4000D SERIES30SR-5 **SURFACE RACEWAY5400 SERIES32SR-6 **SURFACE RACEWAY6000 SERIES140SR-6D **SURFACE RACEWAY(DIVIDED)6000D SERIES63SR-7SURFACE RACEWAY700 SERIES2CT-ATRAYSEE SPEC. SECTION 27 05 284"x6"211CT-B2"x12"211CT-C2"x18"316CT-D2"x24"419CT-E4"x12"419CT-F4"x18"632CT-G4"x24"844CT-H6"x12"636CT-IETR6"X6"316CT-JNOT USED--CT-K--127(6 ¸0$;,080),//)25&$7(*25<,1',&$7(' 3(57,$(,$ $ - CAT6A CABLING HAS AN OD OF 0.285.5('8&(),//5$7,2%<)25($&+ %(1' - ENSURE THAT FILL RATIOS ARE NOT EXCEEDEDʵ&21'8,76+$//21/<%($//2:('$663(&,),&$//<127('21'5$:,1*6 ** REDUCE CAPACITY BY 50% FOR THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: - WHEN CONNECTORS ARE MOUNTED WITHIN RACEWAY - WHEN NON-RADIUS FITTINGS RESTRICT CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA - WHEN RACEWAY IS DIVIDED AND SHARED WITH ELECTRICALTER EXISTING SURFACE RACEWAY TO PROVIDE AT LEAST TWO 16"SECTIONS OF REMOVABLE COVERS TO ALLOW CABLE ROUGH-IN WITHOUTCONFLICT WITH EXISTING FURNITURE CONFIGURATIONS. ALSO REFER TOGENERAL NOTE "Z" ON T-GEN DRAWING FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE FORSURFACE RACEWAYS.WHERE REQUIRED BY RACEWAY CAPACITY, OR AS DIRECTED, PROVIDESURFACE MOUNT EXTENSION BOX ON EXISTING RACEWAY OPENING TOPROVIDE ADEQUATE CAPACITY AND BEND RADIUS. ALSO REFER TORACEWAY DERATING REQUIREMENTS AT LEFT.WHERE REQUIRED BY RACEWAY CAPACITY, OR AS DIRECTED, PROVIDERETROFIT ENTRANCE END FITTING OR ALTER EXISTING BACKFED CONDUITWITH A NEW SPACE SAVER CONNECTOR TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE CAPACITYAND BEND RADIUS FOR NEW CABLING. ALSO REFER TO RACEWAYDERATING REQUIREMENTS AT LEFT. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONSAND PROPOSE ALTERATIONS THAT MINIMIZE SERVICE DISRUPTIONDURATION. PROVIDE ALL TEMPORARY PROVISIONS TO MAINTAIN EXISTINGSERVICES.CONDUIT AND CABLE TRAY TO BE ROUTED CONCEALED UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED.
FIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORGROUND FLOORSUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALL137'105'155'99'141'188'118'194'262'182'257'166'277'130'92'
141'116'141'116'141'116'141'116'141'116'141'116'141'116'141'116'150'117'TR SERVING ZONES - BUILDING SECTION VIEW16Scale: NONEDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBTR SERVING ZONES,PLAN VIEWS ANDBLDG. SECTIONVIEWT1-SZPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTSUB-BASEMENTTR SERVING ZONE PLAN1Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"BASEMENTTR SERVING ZONE PLAN2Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"GROUND FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN3Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"FIRST FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN4Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"SECOND FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN5Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"THIRD FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN6Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"FOURTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN7Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"FIFTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN8Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"SIXTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN9Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"SEVENTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN10Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"EIGHTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN11Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"NINTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN12Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"TENTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN13Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"ELEVENTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN14Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"TWELFTH FLOORTR SERVING ZONE PLAN15Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'
SUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLSUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLScale: NONEPATHWAY LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAM - NEW WORK2Scale: NONEPATHWAY LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAM - EXISTING / REMOVAL1DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBPATHWAYS LOGICALRISER DIAGRAMST1-PLPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT
SUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLSUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBCOPPER LOGICALRISER DIAGRAMST1-CLPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTScale: NONECOPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAM - NEW WORK2Scale: NONECOPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAM - EXISTING / REMOVAL1
SUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLSUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBFIBER LOGICALRISER DIAGRAMST1-FLPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTScale: NONEFIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAM - NEW WORK2Scale: NONEFIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAM - EXISTING / REMOVAL1
DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELDSUB-BASEMENT ANDBASEMENTPATHWAYS ANDCABLINGPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD SUB-BASEMENT -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 3/32" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0BRADFIELD BASEMENT -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0SUB-BASEMENT KEY PLANBASEMENT KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
BRADFIELD GROUND FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-G_1.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD GROUNDAND FIRST FLOORPATHWAYS ANDCABLINGT2-G_1.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD FIRST FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0GROUND FLOOR KEY PLANFIRST FLOOR KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
BRADFIELD SECOND FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"08'16'4'DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-2_3.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD SECONDAND THIRD FLOORPATHWAYS ANDCABLINGT2-2_3.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD THIRD FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"08'16'4'SECOND FLOOR KEY PLANTHIRD FLOOR KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
BRADFIELD FOURTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-4_5.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD FOURTHAND FIFTH FLOORPATHWAYS ANDCABLINGT2-4_5.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD FIFTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0FOURTH FLOOR KEY PLANFIFTH FLOOR KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
BRADFIELD SIXTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-6_7.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD SIXTHAND SEVENTHFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-6_7.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD SEVENTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0SIXTH FLOOR KEY PLANSEVENTH FLOOR KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
BRADFIELD EIGHTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-8_9.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD EIGHTHAND NINTH FLOORPATHWAYS ANDCABLINGT2-8_9.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTBRADFIELD NINTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0EIGHTH FLOOR KEY PLANNINTH FLOOR KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
16'24'8'016'24'8'0TENTH FLOOR KEY PLANELEVENTH FLOOR KEY PLANBRADFIELD TENTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"BRADFIELD ELEVENTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING2Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-10_11.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD TENTHAND ELEVENTHFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-10_11.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
BRADFIELD TWELFTH FLOOR -COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-12.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBBRADFIELD TWELFTHFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-12.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTTWELFTH FLOOR KEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
EMERSON GROUND FLOOR - COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-G_1.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBEMERSON GROUNDFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-GN.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTKEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
KEY PLANEMERSON FIRST FLOOR - COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-G_1.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBEMERSON FIRSTFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-1N.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
EMERSON SECOND FLOOR - COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-2_3.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBEMERSON SECONDFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-2N.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTKEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
KEY PLANEMERSON THIRD FLOOR - COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-2_3.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBEMERSON THIRDFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-3N.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
EMERSON FOURTH FLOOR - COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS / HORIZONTAL CABLING1Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"16'24'8'0DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T2-4_5.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBEMERSON FOURTHFLOOR PATHWAYSAND CABLINGT2-4N.CA_CPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTKEY PLANEXISTING OUTLET NOTE KEY
KEY PLANDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-GA.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBMTR-GA ENLARGEDPLANS ANDELEVATIONST3-GAPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTGROUND FLOOR - ROOM G07ATELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - EXISTING / REMOVALS1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR - TR-GA (ROOM G07A)TELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - NEW WORK2Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'01'2'1/2'GROUND FLOOR - ROOM G07ABACKBOARD ELEVATION - EXISTING / REMOVALS5Scale: 1" = 1'-0"01'2'1/2'GROUND FLOOR TR-GA (ROOM G07A) RACK ELEVATION - NEW WORK4Scale: 1" = 1'-0"GROUND FLOOR TR-GA (RACK B) FIBER HOUSING (ETR) DETAIL7Scale: NONEGROUND FLOOR TR-GA (ROOM G07A)BACKBOARD ELEVATION - NEW WORK6Scale: 1" = 1'-0"01'2'1/2'01'2'1/2'GROUND FLOOR TR-GA (ROOM G07A)RACK ELEVATION - EXISTING3Scale: 1" = 1'-0"1-100xxx301-400xxx601-700xxx101-200xxx401-500xxx701-800xxx201-300xxx501-600xxx801-900xxx10'-0"1-100xxx301-400xxx601-700xxx101-200xxx401-500xxx701-800xxx201-300xxx501-600xxx801-900xxx7'-3 1/4"11'-11 1/8"
THIRD FLOOR - TR-3A (ROOM 322)TELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - NEW WORK1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"04'8'2'01'2'1/2'THIRD FLOOR TR-3A (ROOM 322) RACK ELEVATION - NEW WORK2Scale: 1" = 1'-0"THIRD FLOOR TR-3A (RACK B)FIBER HOUSING DETAIL4Scale: NONETHIRD FLOOR TR-3A (ROOM 322)BACKBOARD ELEVATION - NEW WORK3Scale: 1" = 1'-0"01'2'1/2'DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-3.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-3A ENLARGEDPLANS ANDELEVATIONST3-3APSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTKEY PLAN8'-0"5'-1 3/8"13'-10 3/4"
DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-6.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-6A ENLARGEDPLANS ANDELEVATIONST3-6APSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTSIXTH FLOOR - ROOM 600CTELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - EXISTING / REMOVALS1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'SIXTH FLOOR - TR-6A (ROOM 611A)TELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - NEW WORK2Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'01'2'1/2'SIXTH FLOOR TR-6A (ROOM 611A) RACK ELEVATION - NEW WORK3Scale: 1" = 1'-0"SIXTH FLOOR TR-6A (RACK B)FIBER HOUSING DETAIL5Scale: NONESIXTH FLOOR TR-6A (ROOM 611A)BACKBOARD ELEVATION - NEW WORK4Scale: 1" = 1'-0"01'2'1/2'KEY PLAN4'-0"4'-4 1/2"7'-10 1/4"3'-6 3/4"
DESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-9.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-9A ENLARGEDPLANS ANDELEVATIONST3-9APSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTNINTH FLOOR - ROOM 900CTELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - EXISTING / REMOVALS1Scale: ############04'8'2'NINTH FLOOR - TR-9A (ROOM 909A)TELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - NEW WORK2Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"04'8'2'01'2'1/2'NINTH FLOOR - ROOM 909ABACKBOARD ELEVATION - NEW4Scale: 1" = 1'-0"01'2'1/2'NINTH FLOOR TR-9A (ROOM 909A) RACK ELEVATION - NEW WORK3Scale: 1" = 1'-0"NINTH FLOOR TR-9A (RACK B)FIBER HOUSING DETAIL5Scale: NONEKEY PLAN4'-0"7'-10 5/8"4'-4 3/8"
KEY PLANDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-GB.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBMTR-GB ENLARGEDPLANS ANDELEVATIONST3-GBPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTGROUND FLOOR - MTR-GB (ROOM G37)TELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - NEW WORK1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"04'8'2'01'2'1/2'GROUND FLOOR MTR-GB (ROOM G37) RACK ELEVATION - NEW WORK2Scale: 1" = 1'-0"
KEY PLANDESCRIPTIONMARKDATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 29, 2012 PLOT BY: jblasz
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-2.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARKROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-2B ENLARGEDPLANS ANDELEVATIONST3-2BPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT2ND FLOOR - TR-2B (ROOM 256)TELECOM EQUIPMENT PLAN - NEW WORK1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"04'8'2'01'2'1/2'2ND FLOOR - ROOM 256BACKBOARD ELEVATION - EXISTING / REMOVALS3Scale: 1 1/8" = 1'-0"01'2'1/2'2ND FLOOR TR-2B (ROOM 256) RACK ELEVATION - NEW WORK2Scale: 1" = 1'-0"
DESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBGENERAL NOTES,SYMBOLS ANDABBREVIATIONS(AMEP SERIES)AMEP-GENPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND4Scale: NONEMECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND3Scale: NONEARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS LEGEND2Scale: NONEABBREVIATIONS1Scale: NONE
DESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBAMEP-AREAS OFWORKT1-AMEPPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTSUB-BASEMENTAMEP AREAS OF WORK1Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"BASEMENTAMEP AREAS OF WORK2Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"GROUND FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK3Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"FIRST FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK4Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"SECOND FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK5Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"THIRD FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK6Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"FOURTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK7Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"FIFTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK8Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"SIXTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK9Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"SEVENTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK10Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"EIGHTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK11Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"NINTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK12Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"TENTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK13Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"ELEVENTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK14Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"TWELFTH FLOORAMEP AREAS OF WORK15Scale: 1/32" = 1'-0"032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'032'64'16'
KEY PLANDESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 1, 2012 PLOT BY: pbarrie
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-GA.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBMTR-GA PARTIALPLANS ANDKEYNOTESAMEP-GAPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTKEY PLANGROUND FLOOR IDF (ROOM G07A)ARCHITECTURAL - EXISTING / DEMO1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR MTR-GA (ROOM G07A)ARCHITECTURAL - NEW WORK4Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR IDF (ROOM G07A)MECHANICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS2Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR IDF (ROOM G07A)ELECTRICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS3Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR MTR-GA (ROOM G07A)ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK6Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR MTR-GA (ROOM G07A)MECHANICAL - NEW WORK5Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'
KEY PLANTHIRD FLOOR IDF (ROOM 322)ARCHITECTURAL - EXISTING / DEMO1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'THIRD FLOOR ITR-3A (ROOM 322)ARCHITECTURAL - NEW WORK4Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'THIRD FLOOR IDF (ROOM 322)MECHANICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS2Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'THIRD FLOOR IDF (ROOM 322)ELECTRICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS3Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'THIRD FLOOR ITR-3A (ROOM 322)ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK6Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'THIRD FLOOR ITR-3A (ROOM 322)MECHANICAL - NEW WORK5Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'DESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 1, 2012 PLOT BY: pbarrie
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-3.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-3A PARTIALPLANS ANDKEYNOTESAMEP-3APSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT
DESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 1, 2012 PLOT BY: pbarrie
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-6.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-6A PARTIALPLANS ANDKEYNOTESAMEP-6APSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTSIXTH FLOOR IDF (ROOM 600C)ARCHITECTURAL - EXISTING / DEMO1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'SIXTH FLOOR ITR-6A (ROOM 611A)ARCHITECTURAL - NEW WORK4Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'SIXTH FLOOR ROOM 613MECHANICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS2Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'SIXTH FLOOR IDF (ROOM 600C)ELECTRICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS3Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'SIXTH FLOOR ITR-6A (ROOM 611A)ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK6Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'SIXTH FLOOR ITR-6A (ROOM 611A)MECHANICAL - NEW WORK5Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'KEY PLAN4'-4 1/2"7'-10 1/4"3'-6 3/4"8'-0 1/8"
NINTH FLOOR IDF (ROOM 900C)ARCHITECTURAL - EXISTING / DEMO1Scale: 3/8" = 1'-0"4'6'2'0NINTH FLOOR ITR-9A (ROOM 909A)ARCHITECTURAL - NEW WORK4Scale: 3/8" = 1'-0"4'6'2'0NINTH FLOOR ROOM 911MECHANICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS2Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'NINTH FLOOR IDF (ROOM 900C)ELECTRICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS3Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'NINTH FLOOR ITR-9A (ROOM 909A)ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK6Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'NINTH FLOOR ITR-9A (ROOM 909A)MECHANICAL - NEW WORK5Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0"04'8'2'DESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 1, 2012 PLOT BY: pbarrie
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-9.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBITR-9A PARTIALPLANS ANDKEYNOTESAMEP-9APSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTKEY PLAN7'-10 5/8"4'-4 3/8"8'-0 1/8"3'-5 5/8"
KEY PLANGROUND FLOOR IDF (ROOM G37)ARCHITECTURAL - EXISTING / DEMO1Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR ITR-GB (ROOM G37)ARCHITECTURAL - NEW WORK4Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR IDF (ROOM G37)MECHANICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS2Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR IDF (ROOM G37)ELECTRICAL - EXISTING / REMOVALS3Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR ITR-GB (ROOM G37)ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK6Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'GROUND FLOOR ITR-GB (ROOM G37)MECHANICAL - NEW WORK5Scale: 1/2" = 1'-0"02'4'1'DESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:PLOT DATE: June 1, 2012 PLOT BY: pbarrie
OWNER PROJECT NO:J:\PROJECTS-Ithaca\2011\11103 CORNELL - NCP\Bradfield 1028B\CAD\11103-1028--T3-GB.dwgFax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCSCALES ON THIS DRAWING ACCURATE WHEN PLOTTED TO: ARCH E1 (30X42 IN.)Cornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBMTR-GB PARTIALPLANS ANDKEYNOTESAMEP-GBPSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT
FULL-HEIGHT PARTITION ASSEMBLYSECTION DETAILSHEAD TYPESJAMB TYPESGENERAL NOTESPARTITION TYPES2Scale: NONEROOM FINISH SCHEDULE5Scale: NONEPARTITION ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE1Scale: NONEJAMB AND HEAD TYPES3Scale: NONENEW ACCESS PANEL - EXISTING GWB CEILING4Scale: NONEDESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBARCHITECTURALDETAILSA4PSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT
GENERAL NOTESDESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBMECHANICALDETAILSM4PSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTCONCRETE ANCHOR DEVICE DETAIL2Scale: NONEINLINE EXHAUST FAN3Scale: NONETRANSFER GRILLE WITHCOMBINATION DAMPER & FILTER1Scale: NONE
FIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORGROUND FLOORSUB-BASEMENTFIRST FLOORTHIRD FLOORFIFTH FLOORSEVENTH FLOORNINTH FLOORELEVENTH FLOORBASEMENTSECOND FLOORFOURTH FLOORSIXTH FLOOREIGHTH FLOORTENTH FLOORTWELFTH FLOORGROUND FLOORBRADFIELD HALLEMERSON HALLGENERAL NOTESSE RATEDNOTES:HINGED TRIM200% NEUTRALCOMPUTER GRADE FEED-THRU LUGSSUB FEED LUGSSUB-FEED BREAKERISOLATED GND BUSSE RATEDNOTES:HINGED TRIM200% NEUTRALCOMPUTER GRADE FEED-THRU LUGSSUB FEED LUGSSUB-FEED BREAKERISOLATED GND BUSSE RATEDNOTES:HINGED TRIM200% NEUTRALCOMPUTER GRADE FEED-THRU LUGSSUB FEED LUGSSUB-FEED BREAKERISOLATED GND BUSSE RATEDNOTES:HINGED TRIM200% NEUTRALCOMPUTER GRADE FEED-THRU LUGSSUB FEED LUGSSUB-FEED BREAKERISOLATED GND BUSGROUNDING SYSTEM RISER DIAGRAM2Scale: NONETELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUND BAR (TGB) DETAIL4Scale: NONELIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE3Scale: NONEDESCRIPTIONMARK DATEPROJECT MANAGER:DRAWN BY:AT PROJECT NO:CHECKED BY:SHEET TITLE:ISSUE DATE:CLIENT:OWNER PROJECT NO:Fax: 585.424.4239115 METRO PARK ROCHESTER, NY 14623www.archi-technology.comPHONE: 585.424.1952LLCCornell UniversityCORNELL UNIVERSITY
BRADFIELD EMERSON - 1028
ITHACA, NYCONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS11103-1028752LP/ELJLBDBELECTRICAL DETAILSE4PSD20 SD50 DD100 DDCDNETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECTELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULES1Scale: NONE
NCPPHASE1A TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
CD PROJECT MANUAL AND SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
DATE: June 29th 2012
PROJECT NAME: Cornell University Network Connectivity Program (NCP)
Phase 2C
TECHNOLOGY: ARCHIT ECHNOLOGY, LLC
CONSULTANT / 115 Metro Park
ENGINEER Rochester, NY 14623
Tel: (585) 4241952
Fax: (585) 4244239
MEP ENGINEER &
ARCHITECT: Beardsley Design Associates
64th South Street
Auburn, NY 13021
Tel: (315) 2537301
Fax: (315) 2537306
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID FORMS
DIVISION 0 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS & EXIBITS
Exhibit A Change order
Exhibit A1 Change Order Documentation Instructions
Exhibit B Schedule of Values for Contractor Payments
Exhibit C Final Release
Exhibit D Application and Certificate of Payment
Exhibit E Guarantee
Exhibit F Contractors Affirmative Action Plan
Form I Use of MBE and WBE Vendors
Form II Summary of Bid Activity with
MBE and WBE Sub contractors
Form III Affirmative action work force report
Form IV MinorityWomen utilization Report
Exhibit G Labor Rate Break Down
Exhibit H Stored Material Invoicing Documentation
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
01 21 00 ALLOWANCES
01 22 00 UNIT PRICING
01 23 00 ALTERNATES
01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHS
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING
01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSE OUT
01 78 22 INVENTORIES
01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
APPENDIX A:
Caldwell Hall Cable Schedule
Day Hall Cable Schedule
Savage/Kinzelberg complex Cable Schedule
Schwartz CTR Performing Arts Cable Schedule
APPENDIX B:
Caldwell Hall (Building Code 1025) Asbestos Survey Reports
Caldwell Hall (Building Code 1025) Lead Based Paint Survey Reports
Day Hall (Building Code 2026) Asbestos Survey Reports
Day Hall (Building Code 2026) Lead Based Paint Survey Reports
Kinzelberg Hall (Building Code 2032A) Asbestos Survey Reports
Kinzelberg Hall (Building Code 2032A) Lead Based Paint Survey Reports
Savage Hall (Building Code 2032) Asbestos Survey Reports
Savage Hall (Building Code 2032) Lead Based Paint Survey Reports
Schwartz CPA (Building Code 2016) Asbestos Survey Reports
Schwartz CPA (Building Code 2016) Lead Based Paint Survey Reports
J Eisner Pavilion (Building Code 2026A) Asbestos Survey Reports
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
J Eisner Pavilion (Building Code 2026A) Lead Based Paint Survey Reports`
STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 6 – WOOD & PLASTICS
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 84 13 Firestopping
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors
08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09 22 16 Non Structural Metal Framing
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 65 36 Resilient Flooring
09 65 37 AntiStatic Resilient Flooring
09 91 23 Interior Painting
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions
DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL
23 01 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements
23 01 01 HVAC General Provisions
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
23 07 13 Duct Insulation
23 07 19 Pipe Insulation
23 13 13 WetPipe Sprinkler Systems
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping
23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
23 31 13 Metal Ducts
23 33 16 Fire Dampers
23 34 63 Centrifugal HVAC Fans
23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units
23 82 19 Fan Coil Units
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 01 00 General Requirements for Electrical Contract
26 01 01 Basic Materials and Methods
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 Electrical Equipment Identification
26 29 10 Motor Starters and Disconnects
26 51 00 Lighting
26 60 00 Fire Alarm System Improvements
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00 Basic Communications Requirements
27 05 28 Communication Systems Pathways
27 05 53 Testing, Identification and Administration
27 11 00 Telecommunication rooms and spaces
27 13 00 Backbone Cabling
27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling
DIVISION 28 – SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 07 10 Security Management System
28 13 00 Access Control
STANDARD INSTALLATION DETAILS
AT07841302 CONCRETE FLOOR FIRESTOP PENETRATION DET AIL (CONDUIT SLEEVE)
AT07841303 CONCRETE FLOOR FIRESTOP PENETRATION DET AIL (CONTINUOUS CONDUIT)
AT27052801 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY CEILING MOUNT IN STALLATION
AT27052802 CABLE TRAY WALL PENETRATION
AT27052803 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY SECODARY CONDUIT INSTALLATION
AT27052804 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY BACKBONE CONDUIT INSTALLATION
AT27052805 TYPICAL PRIMARY/BACKBONE PATHWAY PULLBO X INSTALLATION DETAIL
AT27052806 PULLBOX PBM AND PBL MOUNTING DETAIL F OR INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS
AT27052807 CABLE TRAY TO BOX / FLOOR CONNECTOR FOR A TR
AT27052808 FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY CONNECTION DE TAIL
AT27052809 CONDUIT TO FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY CO NNECTION DETAIL
AT27052810 MISC. FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY / RUNWA Y ENDS DETAIL
AT27052811 4" CONDUIT TO FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY CONNECTION DETAIL
AT27052812 CONDUIT TO FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY CO NNECTION DETAIL
AT27052813 4" CONDUIT TO FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY CONNECTION DETAIL
AT27052814 4" CONDUIT TO FULLY ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY CONNECTION DETAIL
AT27052815 VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL FULLY ENCLOSED C ABLE TRAY DETAIL
AT27052816 FW,JT FISH WALL, JHOOK TO CABLE TRAY
AT27052817 SH,JT SURFACE RACEWAY TO HALLWAY, JH OOK TO CABLE TRAY
AT27052818 SC,CP SURFACE RACEWAY TO CEILING, CON DUIT TO PULLBOX
AT27052819 SC,CP SURFACE RACEWAY TO CEILING, CON DUIT TO PULLBOX
AT27052820 SC,CP SURFACE RACEWAY TO CEILING, CON DUIT TO PULLBOX
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 5
AT27052821 SH,CP SURFACE RACEWAY TO HALLWAY, CON DUIT TO PULLBOX
AT27052822 SH SURFACE RACEWAY TO HALLWAY
AT27052823 SC,CP/SW SURAFCE RACEWAY TO CEILING, SURFACE THROUGH WALL
AT27052824 SC SURFACE RACEWAY TO HALLWAY DETAIL
AT27052825 SH SURFACE RACEWAY TO HALLWAY DETAIL
AT27052826 TYPICAL SR2 SURFACE RACEWAY INSTALLATI ON
AT27052827 TYPICAL ETR SR4D DIVIDED SURFACE RACEW AY OUTLET INSTALLATION
AT27052828
TYPICAL ETR SR4D DIVIDED SURFACE RACEWAY OUTLET IN STALLATION
(W/ EXTENSION)
AT27052829 TYPICAL ETR SR3 SURFACE RACEWAY OUTLET INSTLLATION
AT27052830 TYPICAL SURFACE RACEWAY BRIDGE INSTALLA TION
AT27052831 TYPICAL RECESSED OR SURFACE MOUNTED CON DUIT INSTALLATION
AT27052832 TYPICAL HORIZONTAL CONDUIT/JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
AT27052833 TYPICAL SURFACE CONDUIT INSTALLATION
AT27052834 TYPICAL SURFACE CONDUIT INSTALLATION
AT27052835 TYPICAL RECESSED BACKBOX / CONDUIT DETA ILS
AT27052836 RECESSED CONDUIT VIA (2) 0.75" FLEX CON DUITS DETAIL
AT27052837 COMMUNICATIONS POWER POLE DETAIL
AT27052839 TYPICAL WAP INSTALLATION (OPEN CEILING)
AT27052840 WIRELESS CEILING ENCLOSURE DETAIL
AT27052842 TYPICAL WAP INSTALLATION (WALL MOUNT)
AT27052845
TYPICAL WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET INSTALLATION (SR2 OR
RECESSED CONDUIT)
AT27052846
TYPICAL WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET NEW WORK RE CESSED
INSTALLATION
AT27052847 TYPICAL ELEVATOR / ENERGY MANAGEMENT CO NNECTION
AT27052849 CABLE TRAY EZPATH INSTALLATION
AT27052850 FW (FISH WALL) OUTLET INSTALLATION
AT27052851 CC, CH, CT (CONDUIT TO; CEILING, HALL, TRAY) OUTLET INSTALLATION
AT27052601 TELECOMUNICATIONS ROOM (TR) BONDING AND GROUNDING DETAIL
CU27052801 TYPICAL WIRELESS ACCESS POINT RECESSE D INSTALLATION
CU27052802 TYPICAL WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SURFACE INSTALLATION
CU27052803 TYPICAL WALL OUTLET INSTALLATION
CU27052804 TYPICAL SR2 SURFACE RACEWAY INSTALLATI ON
CU27052805
TYPICAL WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET INSTALLATION (SR2 OR
RECESSED CONDUIT)
CU27052806 TYPICAL FIRE ALARM PANEL CONNECTION
CU27052807 TYPICAL OUTLET PATHWAY / CONNECTION TYP E DETAIL
CU27052808 SECONDARY PATHWAY NEW PULLBOX SIZING / CONNECTION DETAILS
CU27052809 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY SECONDARY CONDUI T INSTALLATION
CU27052810 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY MAJOR HORIZONTAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION
CU27055301 SINGLE GANG FACEPLATE DETAIL VERTICAL INSTALLATION
CU27055302 SINGLE GANG FACEPLATE DETAIL HORIZONT AL INSTALLATION
CU27055303 DOUBLE GANG FACEPLATE DETAIL
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 6
CU27055304 TYPICAL PATCH PANEL LABELING
CU27110001 CABLE RUNWAY LAYOUT / INSTALLATION DETA IL #1
CU27110002 CABLE RUNWAY LAYOUT / INSTALLATION DETA IL #2
CU27134301 SPECIAL CIRCUITS CROSSOVER DETAIL
CU27150001
CABLE INSTALLATION DETAIL AT WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY AND
PERPENDICULAR CONDUIT INTERSECTION
CU28130002 CARD ACCESS DETAIL NEW SINGLE DOOR/FR AME
CU28130003 CARD ACCESS DETAIL NEW DOUBLE DOOR/FR AME
CU28130004 CARD ACCESS DETAIL EXISTING SINGLE DO OR/FRAME
CU28130005 CARD ACCESS DETAILEXISTING DOUBLE DOOR /FRAME
DRAWINGS
Caldwell Hall
TCOVER DRAWING INDEX AND PROJECT SITE PLAN
TGEN STANDARD SYMBOLS, NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS (T SERIES)
T1SZ TR SERVING ZONES, PLAN VIEWS AND BLDG. SEC TION VIEW
T1PL PATHWAY LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1CL COPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1FL FIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T2B.CA_CP BASEMENT PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T21.CA_CP FIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T22.CA_CP SECOND FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T23.CA_CP THRIRD FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T24.CA_CP FOUTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T25.CA_CP FIFTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T3BA MTRBA ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
AMEPGEN GERNERAL NOTES.SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (AMEP SERIES)
T1AMEP AMEP AREAS OF WORK
AMEPBA MTRBA PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
A4 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS
M4 MECHANICAL DETAILS
E4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
Day Hall
TCOVER DRAWING INDEX AND PROJECT SITE PLAN
TGEN STANDARD SYMBOLS, NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS (T SERIES)
T1SZ TR SERVING ZONES, PLAN VIEWS AND BLDG. SEC TION VIEW
T1PL PATHWAY LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1CL COPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1FL FIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 7
T2B.CA_CP BASEMENT PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T21.CA_CP FIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T22.CA_CP SECOND FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T23.CA_CP THRIRD FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T24.CA_CP FOUTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T25.CA_CP FIFTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T3BA MTRBA ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
T3BA .D BDF ROOM B53 DEMOLITION
T3BB ITRBB ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
T34A CTR4A ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
AMEPGEN GERNERAL NOTES.SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (AMEP SERIES)
T1AMEP AMEP AREAS OF WORK
AMEPBA MTRBA PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
AMEPBB ITRBB PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
AMEP4A CTR4A PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
A4 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS
M4 MECHANICAL DETAILS
E4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
Savage/Kinzelberg Complex
TCOVER DRAWING INDEX AND PROJECT SITE PLAN
TGEN STANDARD SYMBOLS, NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS (T SERIES)
T1SZ TR SERVING ZONES, PLAN VIEWS AND BLDG. SEC TION VIEW
T1PL PATHWAY LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1CL COPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1FL FIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T2B.CA_CP BASEMENT PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T21.CA_CP FIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T22.CA_CP SECOND FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T23.CA_CP THRIRD FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T24.CA_CP FOUTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T3BA MTRBA ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
AMEPGEN GERNERAL NOTES.SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (AMEP SERIES)
T1AMEP AMEP AREAS OF WORK
AMEPBA MTRBA PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
AMEP2BA AMEPBASEMENT ENLARGED PLANS
A4 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS
M4 MECHANICAL DETAILS
E4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
NCPPHASE2C TABLE OF CONTENTS 8
Schwartz CTR Performing Arts
TCOVER DRAWING INDEX AND PROJECT SITE PLAN
TGEN STANDARD SYMBOLS, NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS (T SERIES)
T1SZ TR SERVING ZONES, PLAN VIEWS AND BLDG. SEC TION VIEW
T1PL PATHWAY LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1CL COPPER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T1FL FIBER LOGICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
T2SB.CA_CP SUBBASEMENT PATWAYS AND CABLING
T2B.CA_CP BASEMENT PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T2B.D.CA_CP BASEMENT PATHWAYS AND DEMOLITION
T21.CA_CP FIRST FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T22.CA_CP SECOND FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T23.CA_CP THRIRD FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T24.CA_CP FOUTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T25_6_7.CA_CP FIFTH FLOOR PATHWAYS AND CABLING
T3BA MTRBA ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
T33A ITR3A ENLARGED PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
AMEPGEN GERNERAL NOTES.SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (AMEP SERIES)
T1AMEP AMEP AREAS OF WORK
AMEPBA MTRBA PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
AMEP3A ITR3A PARTIAL PLANS AND KEYNOTES
A4 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS
M4 MECHANICAL DETAILS
E4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
AMEP2B_3_4 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL PLANS
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 1 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Gene ral Requirements
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them
offsite, unless indicated to be removed and salvag ed or removed and
reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver
them to Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare
them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed
and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged,
or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting
and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's
onsite operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be
interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Locations of proposed dust and noisecontrol te mporary partitions and
means of egress.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 2 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing
building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste
removal from building.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification
regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and
disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, Review
methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on
substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
3. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires
protection.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective
demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not
be disrupted.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings
before proceeding with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,
do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove
hazardous materials under a separate contract.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,
do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove
hazardous materials under a separate contract.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 3 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be
selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is
on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations
where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing
hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials onsite is not permitted.
G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and
protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fireprotection facilities in service d uring selective demolition
operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to
determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict
with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure
the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain
and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions
specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap
off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas
to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 4 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that
maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be
removed with removal of the wall.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and
debrisremoval operations to ensure minimum interfe rence with roads,
streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection
products and measures to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent
buildings, adjacent finishes and utilities/facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new
construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and
interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to
remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Provide clean room type walkoff sticky protecti ve floor mats at
entrances/exit to Telecommunications Rooms during demolition,
reconstruction and finishing operations. Mats shall have at least 40 tear
off adhesive sheets and be a minimum of 40” long – to help remove dirt,
dust, grit, and contaminants from soles and wheels on contact.
5. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been
removed.
6. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating,
and cooling specified in Division 01, Section 015000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural
supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement,
or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected
or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of
selective demolition.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent
required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to
complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 5 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier
before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to
remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools
designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to
avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify
condition and contents of hidden space before starting flamecutting
operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire suppression devices
during flamecutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermininfested, or otherwise da ngerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of offsite.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method
suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials
so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area onsite.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended
reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of
containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation
requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections,
supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional
for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against
damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect,
items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during
selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after
selective demolition operations are complete.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 6 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with
construction to remain and at regular intervals, using powerdriven saw, then
remove concrete between saw cuts.
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with
construction to remain, using powerdriven saw, the n remove masonry
between saw cuts.
C. Concrete SlabsonGrade: Sawcut perimeter of a rea to be demolished, then
break up and remove.
D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCIWP and its Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings
by one of the methods recommended by RFCI.
E. AirConditioning Equipment: Remove equipment wi thout releasing
refrigerants.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged,
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove
demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA
approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate onsite.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other
device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7 CLEANING
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project: NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
PHASE 2C
Owner: Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Architect: ARCHITECHNOLOGY, LLC,
115 Metro Park
Rochester, New York 14623
1. PROPOSAL FORMS
a. Proposals shall be made only on the forms provided and all blank and underlined spaces
in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both in writing and in
figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents on
behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificate included in the Bid Form shall be
completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully stated. Completed form shall be without
interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer.
2. RECAPITULATION OR PROPOSAL
a. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral,
telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered.
3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION
a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be
addressed to:
Nancy A. Phelps, Manager
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Proposal for: Network Connectivity Program
Phase 2C
Submitted by:
(Bidder)
b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above not later than
2:00 PM on August 17, 2012.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS2
4. BID OPENING
a. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner in Room 133, Humphreys Service
Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, at the hour and date listed in 3b. The Owner
reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and
time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto.
5. BIDDING DOCUMENTS
a. The Bidding Documents will consist of the following:
(1) Instructions to Bidders.
(2) Bid Form.
(3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 "General Requirements".
(4) Drawings and Specifications.
(5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals.
6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED
a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website
(http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm ). For assistance call 6072555343.
b. Additional sets will be available at $75.00 per set without refund. All subcontractors and
suppliers requiring may order these at $75.00 per set without refund. No partial sets will be issued. The
Contract Documents remain the property of the Owner.
c. The successful bidder will be allowed five (5) sets of drawings and specifications.
7. START OF WORK
a. Work on submittals process shall commence immediately upon issuance of written
authorization to proceed with work at the site commencing within twenty one (21) calendar days, from
the date of such authorization. Work in all buildings shall be completed no later than August 22, 2013. It
is anticipated that contract award will be made on or about October 3, 2012.
b. The construction schedule is critical. Work must be completed on time.
c. The Contract shall include for adequate manpower and equipment in his Bid to ensure
that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
8. BONDS
a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with
"Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract
Price. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Each of these Bonds are to be in
a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS3
b. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of
the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded
to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the
Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as
described in 8a above.
9. AWARD OF CONTRACT
a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the
entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance
with the Contract.
b. The Owner reserves the right to consider the base bid and any combination of Alternates
in awarding this Contract as it deems advisable.
c. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will
be considered in making the Award.
d. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities
in Bidding.
e. All Proposals shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60)
calendar days following the bid opening date.
f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty
(60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract.
10. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
a. Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize
himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried on under the
proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he shall fully understand the
facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Contract.
b. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings,
Specifications and associated Bid Documents.
c. By submitting a Proposal, the Bidder covenants and affirms that he has carefully
examined the Drawings, Specifications, associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any,
and the Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation he has
satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters
which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such examination and
investigation, he fully understands the conditions of bidding and that he will not make any claim for, and
waives any right to damage because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the Bid Documents and
the conditions of bidding.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS4
11. DISCREPANCIES
a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications
and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the
Architect, who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be
responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing, addressed to
the Architect. Inquiries received seven (7) or more days prior to date fixed for opening of Bids will be
given consideration.
12. MANDATORY PREBID CONFERENCE
a. A mandatory prebid conference has been scheduled for 10:00 AM , July 20, 2012, in
Room 133 of the Humphreys Service Building. The purpose of the conference will be to clarify the intent
of the Contract Documents if necessary. Results will be published in an Addendum.
13. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS
a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and
experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder
to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties
satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved
individually.
b. In the spaces provided in the Bid Form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he
proposes to perform directly with his own forces.
c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials
suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of
the Proposal.
d. In the Bid Form, there has been listed the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for
which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and
approval of principal subcontractors.
14. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS
a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and
all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided.
b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection
therewith.
15. UNIT PRICES
a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all
Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception, in the spaces provided.
b. Unit Prices shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS5
16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
a. A partial "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or subdivisions of the work is
required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Form.
b. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the
amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's
work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete
"Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract.
17. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS
a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in the
space provided in the Bid Form.
18. SUBSTITUTIONS
a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents.
b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of
work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract,
General Conditions and General Requirements Divis ion 1, by listing the proposed substitutions and the
amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each such proposed substitution in the spaces
provided in the Bid Form. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials
and items specified by name or other particular reference.
19. EXISTING CONDITIONS
a. Each Bidder shall, by careful examination, inform himself as to the nature and location of
the work, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and
local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. Each
Bidder shall make his own deductions of existing conditions which may affect methods or cost of
construction of the work hereunder and he agrees that, if awarded the construction contract, he will make
no claim for damages or other compensation, except such as are provided for in the Contract Documents,
should he encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or
anticipated by him.
20. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION
a. The Owner, Cornell University, a nonprofit educ ational institution, is exempt from
payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes.
21. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX
a. The Owner, Cornell University, a nonprofit educ ational institution, is exempt from
payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS6
22. TAX EXEMPT STATUS
a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect
to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that
they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations.
23. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES
a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt
purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt
articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract.
24. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS
a. Provide with Bid Proposal:
(1) Original of the executed Bid Form including:
· Acknowledgment of Addenda issued prior to bid opening
· Certificate as to Corporate Bidder
· Certificate of NonCollusion
· Schedule of Values
· Alternate Proposals and Unit Prices
· Milestone Schedule
· Resumes of Project Manager, Superintendent and Key Personnel
(2) Bid Bond
b. Within fourteen days after bid opening:
(1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms
(2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors
(3) SixMonth Workforce Projection
c. Execution of Contract:
(1) Insurance Certificate
(2) Performance Bond
(3) Labor and Material Payment Bond
(4) Schedule of Work (bar chart)
(5) Federal Tax Identification Number
END OF SECTION
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 1 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain
percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits
stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed
in the completed Work.
B. FireResistance Ratings: Where indicated, provi de units that comply with
requirements for fireresistance ratings indicated as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other
means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average netarea
compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal
dimensions.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
coldweather construction. Provide natural color o r white cement as required
to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland CementLime Mix: Packaged blend of por tland cement and
hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of
natural sand or crushed stone.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 2 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100
percent passing the No. 16 (1.18mm) sieve.
3. WhiteMortar Aggregates: Natural white sand o r crushed white stone.
4. ColoredMortar Aggregates: Natural sand or cr ushed stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or
ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hotdip galvanized, carbon ste el.
2. Exterior Walls: Hotdip galvanized steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148inch (3.77mm) d iameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148inch (3.77mm) diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches
(407 mm) o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m).
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for SingleWythe Mas onry: Either ladder or
truss type with single pair of side rods.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made
from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. HotDip Galvanized, CarbonSteel Wire: ASTM A 8 2/A 82M; with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60
(Z180) zinc coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Partition Top anchors: 0.105inch (2.66mm) t hick metal plate with 3/8inch
(9.5mm) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and
with closedend plastic tube fitted over rod that a llows rod to move in and out
of tube. Fabricate from steel, hotdip galvanized after fabrication].
1. Corrosion Protection: Hotdip galvanized to com ply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, airentraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, waterrepellent agents, an tifreeze compounds, or
other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 3 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cementlime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cementlime m ortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cementlime mortar.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a
preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate
proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.
Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another
type is indicated.
1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S .
2. For interior nonloadbearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of
Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or
coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as
measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine roughin and built in construction for piping
systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other
Sections.
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry.
After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction
immediately adjacent to opening.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 4 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
C. Use fullsize units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motordriven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before
laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces
and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus
1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by
more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12
mm) total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by
more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and
reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3
m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch
(12 mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,
reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more
than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or
1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12
mm).
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bedjoi nt thickness of adjacent
courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 5 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with
uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement
type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using lessthanhalfsize units,
particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed
masonry in running bond ; do not use units with less than nominal 4inch
(100mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or j ambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond . Bond and
interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less
than nominal 4inch (100mm) horizontal face dimens ions at corners or
jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each
course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean
masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E. Builtin Work: As construction progresses, buil d in items specified in this and
other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around builtin items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Where builtin items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,
place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and
rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing
plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build nonloadbearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of
solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of
partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and
push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2inch (13 mm) clearance
between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches
o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge nonloadbearing partitions against struct ure above with small
pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after deadload
deflection of structure above approaches final position.
4. At firerated partitions, treat joint between to p of partition and underside of
structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "FireResistive Joint
Systems."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 6 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal
to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting
course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at
starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter
ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not
deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer
larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other directapplied
finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a
minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13
mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation
walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below
wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings[ in
addition to continuous reinforcement].
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated Tshaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated Lshaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity
at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other
special conditions.
3.7 LINTELS
A. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12
inches (305 mm) for bricksize units and 24 inches (610 mm) for blocksize
units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 7 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless
otherwise indicated.
3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as
needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed
masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of
mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and
shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be
placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts
and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum
pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained,
or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units
to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence
of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep
holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners,
openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. InProgress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as wor k progresses by dry
brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed
masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and
nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave onehalf of panel
uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of
sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with
cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or
polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 8 of 8
JUNE 29, 2012
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8
2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 422200
BID FORM BF1
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
PHASE 2C
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
BID FORM
Submitted by: Date
To: Nancy A. Phelps, Manager
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Gentlemen:
The undersigned,
(Name of Bidder)
a
(Type of Firm, State of Incorporation, if applicable)
of
(Address)
having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General,
Division 1 "General Requirements"), and the Drawi ngs, Specifications and associated Bid Documents
dated June 29, 2012 prepared by ArchiTechnology, L LC, 115 Metro Park, Rochester, New York 14623,
as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment,
labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to
perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following
considerations:
1. BASE BID
a. All work complete, for the sum of
($ )
for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and
SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS.
BID FORM BF2
2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL
a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in
place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance
with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the
Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications.
b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will
result neither in an addition to nor a deduction from the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No
Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates.
c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the
following Alternate Proposals within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction
contract.
Alternate No. Description
ADD DEDUCT
NONE $ $
3. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, agrees to commence the submittal
process immediately upon issuance of written authorization to proceed and work at the site within twenty
one (21) calendar days, from the date of such authorization. Work in all buildings shall be completed no
later than August 22, 2013. It is anticipated that contract award will be made on or about October 3,2012.
b. The construction schedule is critical. Work must be completed on time.
c. The Contract shall include for adequate manpower and equipment in his Bid to ensure
that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
BID FORM BF3
4. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the
following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions:
(1) Prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect reserve the right to review
the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors", and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom
they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal
subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract.
b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision
of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3)
names.
c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of
the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each such Section or Subdivision.
Communications
Mechanical/Plumbing
Carpentry
Painting
Sprinkler & Fire Protection (if applicable)
BID FORM BF4
5. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED
BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FORCES
a. If awarded a Contract, we will perform the following portions of the Work with forces
directly employed by the undersigned:
b. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor’s main Project Manager will be:
(include resume with bid)
The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable
objection.
c. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor’s main Superintendent will be:
(include resume with bid)
6. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Time Progress Schedule"
showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together
with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required.
b. The undersigned shall submit with their bid the completed Milestone and
Manpower Schedules contained herein to assist the Owner’s review.
7. BONDS
a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract to
execute and deliver to the Owner "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such form
as acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Such bonds will be
furnished by
(Name of Surety)
BID FORM BF5
b. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $______________________ (10% of Bid
Amount) is attached to this Bid.
8. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the
request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values"
including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions
of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum.
b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid
the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work
included under Alternate Proposals are excluded. Values relative to General Contractor's costs for
General Conditions are excluded.
Values Included
Spec in Base Bid
Section Description of work Labor Material
Div 0001 General Conditions and Requirements
Caldwell Hall
02 41 19
26 60 00 AMEP Construction
27 05 00
27 05 28 Communications Pathways
27 11 00 Telecommunications Room Fit out
27 13 00
27 05 53 Communications Cabling
28 07 10
2813 00 Card Access
ALLOWANCE # 1 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 2 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 3 $5,000
BID FORM BF6
Day Hall
02 41 19
26 60 00 AMEP Construction
27 05 00
27 05 28 Communications Pathways
27 11 00 Telecommunications Room Fit out
27 13 00
27 05 53 Communications Cabling
28 07 10
2813 00 Card Access
ALLOWANCE # 1 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 2 $10,000
ALLOWANCE # 3 $5,000
Savage/Kinzelberg Complex
02 41 19
26 60 00 AMEP Construction
27 05 00
27 05 28 Communications Pathways
27 11 00 Telecommunications Room Fit out
27 13 00
27 05 53 Communications Cabling
28 07 10
2813 00 Card Access
ALLOWANCE # 1 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 2 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 3 $5,000
BID FORM BF7
Schwartz CTR Performing Arts
02 41 19
26 60 00 AMEP Construction
27 05 00
27 05 28 Communications Pathways
27 11 00 Telecommunications Room Fit out
27 13 00
27 05 53 Communications Cabling
28 07 10
2813 00 Card Access
ALLOWANCE # 1 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 2 $5,000
ALLOWANCE # 3 $3,000
Balance of Base Bid, Unclassified
Total
Total Combined Bid $
BID FORM BF8
9. SUBSTITUTIONS
a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without
substitutions.
b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the
exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements Division 1, by listing in
the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if
the substitution is accepted.
c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution.
d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be
required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by
the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications.
Item and Specification
Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid
Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material
BID FORM BF9
10. ACCEPTANCE
a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period of
not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid due date.
b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, or delivered to the undersigned
within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this
Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing,
or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or
supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted.
c. The undersigned further agrees, if requested by the Owner, to furnish Performance and
Payment Bonds pursuant to Article 7 herein within ten (10) calendar days of issuance of such notice.
d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the
Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract.
e. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all
proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above noted period of
time.
f. The Owner reserves the right to consider the base bid and any combination of Alternates
in awarding this Contract as it deems advisable.
BID FORM BF10
11. UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or
"deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect,
computed in accordance with the unit prices hereinafter listed, which prices include all overhead, profit
and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents.
b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with
all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental
work.
c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit
and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith.
d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items.
e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below
prior to the execution of the Contract.
UNIT PRICE ADD DEDUCT
UP1 Install two category 6 cables into
an outlet location.
$
$
UP2 Install one category 6A cable into
an outlet location.
$
$
UP3 Install one surface mount double
gang outlet box
$
$
UP4 Install one surface mount double
gang outlet box.
$
$
UP5 Install one recessed mount double
gang outlet box.
$
$
UP6 Install one linear foot of JHook
pathway.
$
$
UP7 Install one linear foot of 1” EMT.
$ $
UP8 Install one linear foot of 2” EMT.
$ $
UP9 Install one linear foot of 4” EMT.
$ $
UP10 Install one linear foot of SR2
(2400) series raceway.
$
$
BID FORM BF11
UNIT PRICE ADD DEDUCT
UP11 Install one linear foot of SR4
(4000) series raceway.
$
$
UP12 Install one linear foot of SR7 (700)
series raceway.
$
$
UP13 Install one PBS .
$ $
UP14 Install one PBM x.
$ $
UP15 Drill (1) 5”diameter core.
$ $
UP16 Drill (1) 3”diameter core.
$ $
UP17 Drill (1) 1.25”diameter core.
$ $
BID FORM BF12
12. ADDENDUM RECEIPT
a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or
Specifications is acknowledged:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
(Bidder)
By:
Title:
Business Address:
Dated:
BID FORM BF13
CERTIFICATE OF NONCOLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in
the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that
to the best of his knowledge and belief:
a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,
communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such
prices with any other bidder or with any competitor.
b. Unless required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been
knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening,
directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor.
c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons,
partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
(Bidder)
By:
Title:
Dated:
BID FORM BF14
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the
_____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for
General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf
of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his
signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly
signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body.
(SecretaryClerk)
(CORPORATE SEAL)
Dated:
BID FORM BF15
MILESTONE SCHEDULE
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
PHASE 2C
OWNER'S
EARLIEST
START
CONTRACTOR'S
SCHEDULED
START
OWNER'S
LATEST
FINISH
CONTRACTOR'S
SCHEDULED
FINISH
Contract Award
CALDWELL HALL
TR Construction
Backbone Pathways
Cabling
Cutover
Removal
DAY HALL
TR Construction
Backbone Pathways
Cabling
Cutover
Removal
SAVAGE/KINZELBERG COMPLEX
TR Construction
Backbone Pathways
Cabling
Cutover
Removal
BID FORM BF16
SCHWARTZ CTR PERFORMING ARTS
TR Construction
Backbone Pathways
Cabling
Cutover
Removal
Construction Complete August 22, 2013
Notes:
1. The Contractor shall complete this schedule and submit with the bid.
BID FORM BF17
MANPOWER SCHEDULE
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
PHASE 2C
Contractor’s proposed shift (i.e. 510 hr days)
Start time for shift
No. of Foremen per shift
Name of Foremen/Trade ____ /____________
____ /____________
____ /____________
Additional shift – duration and start time
(if required) ___ /_____________
___ /_____________
___ /_____________
___ /_____________
The Contractor is required to meet the schedule as detailed in this specification without slippage. It is the
Contractor’s sole responsibility to provide sufficient personnel at all times to complete the construction work
within the required time frame regardless of the Manpower Schedule proposed above.
The Contractor shall complete this schedule and submit with the bid.
Rev 032012
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S
FOR
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
PHASE 2C
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK
i Rev 032012
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Section 1.01 Owner 1
Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans
and Drawings 1
Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1
ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR
Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2
Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2
Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2
Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3
Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3
Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4
Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4
Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4
Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5
Section 2.10 Meetings 5
Section 2.11 Related Work 5
Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5
Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5
Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6
Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6
ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6
Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6
Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7
Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7
Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7
Section 3.06 Acceptance 7
ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 Changes 8
Section 4.02 Form of Change Orders 10
ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION
Section 5.01 Time of Completion 10
ii Rev 032012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION
Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 12
Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 12
Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 12
ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES
Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 12
ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS
Section 8.01 Subcontracting 13
ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 14
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 15
Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 16
Section 10.03 Emergencies 16
Section 10.04 Bonds 16
Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 16
Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 17
Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 18
Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 19
Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 20
Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 20
ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER
Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 20
Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 20
ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT
Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 20
Section 12.02 Withholding Payments 23
Section 12.03 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 23
Section 12.04 Final Payment and Release 24
ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION
Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 25
iii Rev 032012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE
Section 14.01 Guarantee 25
ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS
Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 26
Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 26
Section 15.03 Assignments 26
Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 26
Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 26
Section 15.06 Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action 27
Section 15.07 Limitation on Actions 28
Section 15.08 Owner's Representative 28
ARTICLE 16 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 28
ARTICLE 17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 29
ARTICLE 18 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME
Section 18.01 Release of Information 29
Section 18.02 Confidential Information 29
Section 18.03 Use of Owner's Name 29
ARTICLE 19 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF
ETHICAL CONDUCT 30
EXHIBITS
A Change Order
A?1 Change Order Documentation Instructions
Construction Contract Change Order Request
Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Schedule of Values for Contract Payment
C Final Release
D Application and Certificate for Payment
E Guarantee
F Form I Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan
Use of MBE and WBE Vendors
Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan
Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE
Subcontractors and Vendors
Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report
Form IV Minority?Women Utilization Report
G Labor Rate Breakdown
H Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation
1 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 1 (( INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Section 1.01 ? Owner
A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University".
B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches,
test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether
furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The
Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of
this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University.
C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract
relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality,
acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to
said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly
provided.
D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between
the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and
determined by the Owner.
E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal
notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various
provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to
which they refer.
Section 1.02 ? Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings
The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a
manner approved by the Owner.
Section 1.03 ? Order of Precedence
A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract
Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the
better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs
in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and
not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the
plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both.
C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the
extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with
provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern.
2 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 2 (( CONTRACTOR
Section 2.01 ? Contractor's Obligations
A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work
required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply
with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the
local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins?Cortland Building
Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed
by Union labor.
B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant
and such temporary Work as may be required.
C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment,
machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or
regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or
distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay,
damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case
progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or
equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or
regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal
kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
Section 2.02 ? Contractor's Title to Materials
A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all
materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or
encumbrances.
B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner
shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.
Section 2.03 ? "Or Equal" Clause
A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the
plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name,
catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal"
considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements,
Section 01 25 00.
3 Rev 032012
B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said
proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this
Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new
drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved
by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed
substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be
reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure.
Section 2.04 ? Quality, Quantity and Labeling
A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity
specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into
the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose.
When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall
supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material
which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or
used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.
B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require
that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials
meet said standards.
C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test
materials as provided in the Contract.
D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other
particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit
in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the
Contract is executed.
Section 2.05 ? Superintendence by Contractor
A. The Contractor shall employ a full?time competent construction superintendent
and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall
have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner
with the names and authority of such personnel in writing.
B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor
shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent
satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's
approval.
C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or
of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner.
4 Rev 032012
Section 2.06 ? Subsurface or Site Conditions
A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract
consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface
conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the
Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the
Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site
prior to the Owner's receipt of bids.
B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the
site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract
Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information
made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of
the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they
are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The
Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do
substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor,
the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a
change order shall be issued.
Section 2.07 ? Representations of Contractor
The Contractor represents and warrants:
A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to
perform the Work;
B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances,
orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work;
C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely
and satisfactorily constructed.
D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work
and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the
Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be
encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the
Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the
Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract
Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work
and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work.
Section 2.08 ? Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions
A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all
dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or
conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer
said conflict to the Owner.
5 Rev 032012
B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements
prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to
meet field conditions.
C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location
of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or
spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner.
D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of
Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and
other affected Contractors and Subcontractors.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place.
F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in
additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs.
Section 2.09 ? Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors
A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to five (5) sets of
Contracts Documents.
B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the
Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing.
C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the
property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the
signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work.
Section 2.10 ? Meetings
The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed
by the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
Section 2.11 ? Related Work
The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship
of said work to the Work under the Contract.
Section 2.12 ? Surveys and Layout
Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the
Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the
Work.
Section 2.13 ? Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies
The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and
report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
6 Rev 032012
Section 2.14 ? Project Labor Rates
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30)
days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance
for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates
shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts
during this project.
Section 2.15 – Daily Reports
The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell
University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall be
submitted via Daily Work Report (DWR) tool on MasterLibrary at a minimum, contain the
following information:
Name of Project
Project Number
Date of Report
Weather Conditions
Equipment on the site
Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor
Work/area and activity for each contractor
Overtime worked and planned work progress
Environmental problems and corrections
Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or
injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start?up and check out,
occupancy, etc.
ARTICLE 3 (( INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
Section 3.01 ? Access to the Work
The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or
inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by
the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition,
the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly
authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which
may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of
the work.
Section 3.02 ? Notice for Testing
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public
authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the
Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the
Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of
such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided.
7 Rev 032012
Section 3.03 ? Inspection of Work
A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and
examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner
that the work will not be delayed.
B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of
manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the
inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the
Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good,
replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or
damaged by said removal or replacement.
C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be
secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner.
Section 3.04 ? Inspection and Testing
All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in
accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability
for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or
concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the
Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the
Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional
professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said
additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be
ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said
Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of
reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract,
the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement.
Section 3.05 ? Defective or Damaged Work
If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged
materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in
accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by
an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable.
Section 3.06 ? Acceptance
No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the
Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other
Work resulting therefrom.
8 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 4 (( CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 ? Changes
A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the
general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders.
Changes will be requested by the Owner in the form of a Field Order and will be issued via
MasterLibrary.Com. Should the field order not impact the overall cost or time of the project, the
Contractor shall acknowledge the Field Order on MasterLibrary and complete the work requested
in the field order without delay. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall enter
completion notes on the field order form on MasterLibrary and Mark the Field Order as complete
However, should the requested work impact the overall cost or required time, the
Contractor shall submit to the Owner a proposal via MasterLibrary with a detailed breakdown of
the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Proposed Work
as an attachment in the format detailed in Exhibit A?1.
The Contractor shall enter “PROP?###” from MasterLibrary on the form A?1 where COR
number is required. On MasterLibrary the contractor shall enter the Total Cost from the Exhibit
A?1 in the Price Field. The Contractor shall also enter a Title for the Proposal (COR) on
MasterLibrary, as well as a brief description of the work.
A Proposal (COR) can be submitted via MasterLibrary directly from the Field Order
form or can be entered directly into MasterLibrary as a new Proposal. If a proposal is in response
to a Field Order, the Proposal shall be linked to the Field Order. This can be done by selecting
the related Field Order via the dropdown selector on the Proposal forms.
B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner,
issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an
adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance.
C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or
an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by
the Owner.
D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to
be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods:
1. By agreement with the Contractor.
2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved.
This method shall be used if the Contract contains applicable unit prices.
(i) To the extent that a Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the
Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance
with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any
portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than
25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as
applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
9 Rev 032012
(ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be
algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit
Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and
deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and
then multiplied by the applicable markup.
(iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover
profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without
limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such
as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and
inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field
and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes,
temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as?
built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of:
(i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and
insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of
superintendent directly employed at the Site.
(ii) Materials
(iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the
Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and
directly on the Work.
4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in
Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu
of estimated costs.
E. Mark?ups:
1. Work performed by the Contractor. Where the Work is performed directly
by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal
to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
2. Work performed by a Subcontractor. Where the change order work is
performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by
adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said
Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional
sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs.
3. Work performed by a Sub?Subcontractor. Where work is performed by a
Sub?Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of
said costs for the benefit of said Sub?Subcontractor, by adding for the
benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%)
of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional
sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost.
4. No markup shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay.
10 Rev 032012
5. No markup shall be paid on insurance, taxes, fringe benefits or bond cost.
Where the Work involves both an increase and a reduction in similar or
related Work, the above percentage override shall be applied only on the
amount, if any, that the cost of the increase exceeds the cost of the
reduction.
F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a
change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of
value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all
subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit
A?1. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation and shall be
submitted via MasterLibrary as a Proposal in response to the Field Order under which the request
was made.
G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation
specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any
damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work
to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights
to any other compensation for said damage or expense.
H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all
items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and
records relating thereto.
Section 4.02 ? Form of Change Orders
All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved on the Owner's change
order form, which is included herein as Exhibit "A" and made a part of the Contract Documents.
No alteration to this form shall be acceptable to the Owner and no payment for change order
Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved on said
form. Copies of all change orders will be logged into and issued to the Contractor via
MasterLibrary in addition to hard copy forms.
ARTICLE 5 (( TIME OF COMPLETION
Section 5.01 ? Time of Completion
A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the
Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All
required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid.
B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in
the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract.
11 Rev 032012
C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure
full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for
the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the
average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the
Site.
D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in
which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion
established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it
becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of
the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas.
E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved
schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas.
F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the
Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time
extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any
excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to:
1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the
Government of the United States or the State of New York;
2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or
negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but
not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires,
epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and
unusually severe weather.
G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be
extended for:
1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order.
H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more
than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived.
12 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 6 (( TERMINATION
Section 6.01 ? Termination for Cause
In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any
Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and
upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The
notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If
arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the
Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of
termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred
by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may
utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be
necessary or useful in completing the Work.
Section 6.02 ? Termination for Convenience of Owner
The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said
termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the
extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which
said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor
shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall
pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said
termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total
consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work
and prosecute same to completion.
Section 6.03 ? Owner's Right to do Work
The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed
by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies
due or to become due the Contractor.
ARTICLE 7 (( DISPUTES
Section 7.01 ? Disputes Procedure
A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to
perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any
action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall:
1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's
claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed
within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the
disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing
performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen
(15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the
Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract.
13 Rev 032012
2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with
the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the
Owner.
3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed
matter.
4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a
dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days
after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written
statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is
contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the
Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original
decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's
claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a
notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute
but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as
directed.
B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed
unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner.
C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the
methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions.
D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be
deemed to be:
1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that
the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and
provisions of the Contract;
2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation,
time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or
omission.
ARTICLE 8 (( SUBCONTRACTS
Section 8.01 ? Subcontracting
A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed
Subcontractor and Sub?Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not
award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub?Subcontractor without the prior written approval of
the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of
Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors.
14 Rev 032012
D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all
subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the
Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the
Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the
Contractor.
E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's
obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control
and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors.
F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship
between Subcontractors and the Owner.
ARTICLE 9 (( COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
Section 9.01 ? Cooperation with Other Contractors
A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the
Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award
separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's
forces or separate Contractors.
B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations
or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear
the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of
other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other
contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship
on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the
Contractor's operations.
D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of
progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor
of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work.
E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the
Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall
investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such
directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner
shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's
failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another
contractor's default in performance.
F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work
with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed:
1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the
Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and
15 Rev 032012
2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any
and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which
the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason
of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions.
G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any
other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any
Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for
said damage.
H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage
through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse
said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from
all said claims.
ARTICLE 10 (( PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 ? Accidents and Accident Prevention
A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of
persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all
applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible
for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods,
and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance,
or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods.
B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death,
occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work,
arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately
notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death. The
Contractor shall supply the Owner with all Contractor and Subcontractor written accident
investigation forms and accident reports prepared.
C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets
(OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site as a pdf document in
MasterLibrary. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or
disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought
to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site.
1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The
label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the
Contractor's name.
2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the
hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in
accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's
recommendations shall be used at all times.
16 Rev 032012
3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and
Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the
quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and
supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss
in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the
Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said
loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all
materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any
damage thereto until Final Acceptance.
Section 10.02 ? Adjoining Property
A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to
repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or
subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the
Contract.
Section 10.03 ? Emergencies
A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the
Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent
manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify
the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken.
Section 10.04 ? Bonds
A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply
the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default.
Section 10.05 ? Risks Assumed by the Contractor
A. Indemnification. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor
shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against all
claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting
from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, those arising out of bodily or
personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or destruction of tangible property, including
the loss of use resulting therefrom, to which the Owner, its agents or employees may be subjected
by reason of any negligent act or omission, willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this
Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not
it is caused in part by the Owner, except to the extent caused by Owner's own negligence.
17 Rev 032012
1. In the event that any party is requested but refuses to honor the
indemnity obligations hereunder, then the party indemnifying shall, in addition to
all other obligations, pay the cost of bringing any such action, including
attorneys' fees, to the party requesting indemnity.
B. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor
the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section.
The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of
particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of
the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for
risk or claims of the type enumerated.
Section 10.06 ? Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance
A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until
final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of
insurance:
1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the
requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may
be applicable thereto, including Coverage B ? Employer's Liability with a limit of
not less than $1,000,000.
2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard
comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed
operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s
issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations
under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract
and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The
Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability
Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy
shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is
primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for
not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such
policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and
Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever
is greater:
BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM)
$ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence
$ 5,000,000 Aggregate
18 Rev 032012
3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection
with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non?owned and
hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being
used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear
license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined
single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of:
BODILY INJURY AND
PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY
$ 1,000,000 Each Person
$ 1,000,000 Each Accident
B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability,
including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits
as required under this section.
C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on
behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they
apply to subcontractors.
D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the
insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates.
Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and
shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall
not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and
continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract,
unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of
the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of
insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office
of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each
policy including any and all exclusions to such policy.
E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled,
terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner
shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If
the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner
may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the
Contractor's expense.
Section 10.07 ? Liability Insurance of the Owner
A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability
insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for
damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from
operations under this Contract.
19 Rev 032012
Section 10.08 ? Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage
Insurance Hazards
A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance
policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an
amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the
contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all
subcontractors and sub? subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the
insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty
(30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at
the site, including reasonable compensation for architects services and expenses made necessary
by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site
and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as
may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be
suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to
cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless
Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell
University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and
exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall
provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery
between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are
covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to
final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial
occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such
partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms.
B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected
with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind
or nature.
D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and
subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property
of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the
Contract incident to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but
not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their
contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included
in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any
loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor,
subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be
included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors
severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for
damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever
kind or nature.
20 Rev 032012
Section 10.09 ? Effect of Procurement of Insurance
A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the
Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or
release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the
Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks.
Section 10.10 ? No Third Party Rights
A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of
action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist
irrespective of the Contract.
ARTICLE 11 (( USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER
Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion
A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the
extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or
specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all
certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and
plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County,
and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction.
Section 11.02 ? Occupancy Prior to Acceptance
A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the
Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein
equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no
way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner.
B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems,
materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any
guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under
the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which
shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner.
ARTICLE 12 (( PAYMENT
Section 12.01 ? Provision for Payment
A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the
performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract
Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents.
21 Rev 032012
B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been
completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications
have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments
made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the
satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract.
C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses
in accord with the following procedure:
1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the
total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as
specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This
schedule, attached hereto as Exhibit "B" and made a part of the Contract
Documents, when approved by the Owner and Architect shall be used as a basis
for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a
statement based upon this approved schedule.
2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a
meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and
materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted
by the Contractor in the requisition for payment.
(b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable,
the Contractor shall submit “Pencil Copies” of all documents as
attachments to the applicable “Pay App” on MasterLibrary. Values from
the contractors AIA 702 form will be entered on the Pay App in
MasterLibrary and all forms and documentation as required in this
section shall be attached to the Pay App on MasterLibrary. Upon
approval of the Pencil Copy a written statement, including Contract
Number, full name of the project and the name of the Owner's
Representative as set forth in Article 15, Section 15.08, in approved
format to the Architect with five (5) copies, setting forth in detail the cost
of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and
including the last day of the previous month and shall make application
for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement,
less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against
the Contract Price.
(c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by duplicate
copies of an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the
statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials
incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the
preceding progress payment, have been paid. Before final payment is
made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material
bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract
have been paid, including final waivers of any liens.
22 Rev 032012
(d) If, pursuant to a prior written agreement with the Owner, payments
are requested on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in
the work which have been delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at
some other location, such payments shall be conditioned upon
submission by the Contractor of bills of sale, insurance certificates,
notice of bonded warehousing, in accordance with Exhibit “H”. The
Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off?site to
the site.
3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and
approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application
for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection
therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar
days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the
payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor.
The Architect shall submit the approved applications for payment to:
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by
the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment,
that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their
knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the
amount certified.
After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall
make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30)
calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate from the Architect.
However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Architect shall not
hereby be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or
continuous on?site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that
the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously
paid on account of the Contract Sum.
5. Any reduction with respect to retention shall be done in accordance with
the Change Order provisions as outlined in Article 4 of these General Conditions.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written request for such reduction
including a Consent of the Surety for such reduction.
6. The remaining ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and
materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the
Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work
within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.04.
23 Rev 032012
D. "Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments" and "Schedule Contractors
Monthly Requisitions" (AIA Document G702; Application and Certificate for Payment) must be
submitted, in the form as those contained herein as Exhibit "D", to comply with requirements for
tax exemption.
Section 12.02 ? Withholding Payments
A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or
nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the
Owner from loss on account of:
1. Defective work not remedied.
2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or
materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's
property.
3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of
the Contract Price then unpaid.
4. Damage to another Contractor.
5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor.
6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method
Network Schedule.
Section 12.03 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment
A. As?Built Documentation
1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of
current reproducible full?size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has
recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field
construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Final Documentation:
1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment
in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following
documents with the Owner.
a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other
extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub?Contractors in
accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto.
24 Rev 032012
c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01
78 39.
d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed.
e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General
Requirements Section 01 78 23.
f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section
01760.
2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or
Word Documents of all documentation.
Section 12.04 ? Final Payment and Release
A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is
substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to
be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete
detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract
requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect.
B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of
the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the
Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the
Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion.
C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the
work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully
performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of
the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a
part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and
sub?subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that
to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and
inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable.
D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being
estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate.
E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a
general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the
Contractor.
25 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 13 (( TAX EXEMPTION
Section 13.01 ? Tax Exemption
A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including
sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed
Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools,
machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to
supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the
completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and
all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery,
equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials.
B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates
or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said
certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation.
ARTICLE 14 (( GUARANTEE
Section 14.01 – Guarantee
A. The Contractor will provide the Panduit Certification Plus System Warranty.
Corning Cable Systems' network of LANscape® Extended Warranty Program (EWP) installers
will provide the EWP certification
B. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or
repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or
characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or
within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such
guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract,
and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such
defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be
damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance
of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding
C All Guarantees or Warranties of equipment or materials furnished to the
Contractor or Subcontractors by any Manufacturer or Supplier shall be deemed to run to the
benefit of Cornell University. If any Manufacturer or Supplier of any equipment or material
furnishes a Guarantee or Warranty for a period in excess of one (1) year from the date of
acceptance, the Contractor's Guarantee shall be deemed to extend for a like period as to such
equipment or material.
D. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various
components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit
a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E".
Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the
project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E".
26 Rev 032012
E. Within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, the Contractor
shall correct any defects in material or workmanship which exist prior to or during the period of
any Guarantee provided herein and any damage to other work or property caused by such defects
or the repairing of such defects.
F. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall deliver to Cornell
University copies of all Guarantees and Warranties on equipment and materials furnished by all
Manufacturers and Suppliers to the Contractor and all Subcontractors, with duly executed
instruments properly assigned said Guarantees and Warranties to Cornell University. The
Contractor shall bind said copies of Guarantees and Warranties together in a single volume,
grouped by trade and properly indexed.
G. The guarantees and warranties herein specified shall not be construed to modify
or limit, in any way, the Contractor's express or implied warranties or any rights or actions which
Cornell University may have against the Contractor by contract, law, statute, or in equity, for
breach of Contract or improper performance or defective Work.
ARTICLE 15 (( STANDARD PROVISIONS
Section 15.01 ? Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted
Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract
shall be deemed to be inserted therein.
Section 15.02 ? Laws Governing the Contract
The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference
to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall
be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court
for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such
purposes.
Section 15.03 ? Assignments
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written
consent of the Owner.
Section 15.04 ? No Third Party Rights
Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of
action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract.
Section 15.05 ? Waiver of Rights of Owner
A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner
except when such waiver is given in writing.
27 Rev 032012
Section 15.06 ? Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action
A. The Contractor shall submit copies of their Affirmative Action Program and the
Affirmative Action Programs of its proposed subcontractors within thirty (30) days after
execution of a contract. A meeting to review these forms will be scheduled by the Owner after
receipt of the same. Such Affirmative Action Programs must be satisfactory to the Owner. The
Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for
implementing the Affirmative Action Program of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said
Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans'
progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be
submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report and
Minority ? Women Utilization Report attached hereto as Exhibit "F".
B. The Contractor agrees, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provisions of
the Contract, that the Contractor shall comply fully with and shall cooperate in the
implementation of any Affirmative Action Requirements for Equal Employment Opportunity and
Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) participation required by the Owner, at no additional cost
to the Owner. Any such requirements shall be incorporated in their entirety in all subcontracts of
any tier.
C. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to the nondiscrimination
provisions required by applicable federal and state law.
D. The Contractor shall submit for Owner approval, a plan of affirmative action
designed to assure minority group members an equal opportunity in employment and subcontract
work within thirty (30) days of contract award. The Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan must
be approved by the Owner.
E. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "F" and made a part of the
Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting Affirmative Action Plans and hereby made a
part of the Contract Documents.
1. Use of MBE and WBE Vendors (Form I)
2. Summary of bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and
Vendors (Form II)
3. Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Form III)
4. Minority?Women Utilization Report (Form IV)
This Plan is supplementary to all federal and state nondiscrimination
requirements. Cornell University is an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer.
F. The goals for participation (minority and female), expressed in percentage terms
for the Contractor’s aggregate work force in each trade on all construction work, are as follows:
Carpenters 4.8%
Electricians 14.1%
Laborers 7.8%
Masons 2.8%
Painters 25.7%
Plumbers 5.9%
Sheetmetal Workers 4.0%
28 Rev 032012
G. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of
the Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Exhibit F – Form III) on a monthly basis. The Prime
Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the
project labor. On?site office personnel should not be included in the "workforce" totals. Such
forms shall be submitted to:
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Section 15.07 ? Limitation on Actions
No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor
against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by
the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner,
unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination.
Section 15.08 ? Owner's Representative
A. The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with
respect to the Project. The Owner or its designated representative (ArchiTechnology identified
staff) shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto
promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work.
B. Directives affecting cost and/or schedule shall only be recognized by the
Contractor from Cornell University’s designated representative (Tom Theimer).
C. ArchiTechnology identified staff shall provide on?site construction
oversight and serve as construction advisors to Owner. Directives not affecting cost or
schedule shall be recognized by the Contractor and executed as if issued by the Owner’s
representative.
ARTICLE 16 (( ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT
The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for
the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing
files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection
and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's
local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a
period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or
audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained
until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub?
Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books
and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies
of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the
project.
29 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 17 (( ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims
for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account
thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to
believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be
responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell
University.
ARTICLE 18 (( CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME
Section 18.01 ? Release of Information
The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news
releases, internal house organs, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell
University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they
need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement
from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing.
Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and
specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release
information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager.
Section 18.02 ? Confidential Information
The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or
received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell
University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not
disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the
extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and
until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall
hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use
confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its
subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed
to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each
subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be
sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before
any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes
known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties.
Section 18.03 ? Use of Owner's Name
The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, or other
promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the
specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative.
30 Rev 032012
ARTICLE 19 – CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT
Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student
employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard
of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 ? Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy
of which is available at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. This
includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do
business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers.
Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their
families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the
acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee
for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of
an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In
addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business
related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies,
practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report
violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel.
EXHIBIT "A"
Distribution to:
OWNER
ARCHITECT
CONTRACTOR
FIELD CHANGE ORDER
OTHER
Cornell University
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853
PROJECT: CHANGE ORDER NUMBER:
TO (Contractor): INITIATION DATE:
OWNER'S CONTRACT NO:
CONTRACT DATE:
You are directed to make the following changes in this Contract:
Item No. Description Reference Amount
Not valid until signed by both the Owner and Contractor.
Signature of the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement herewith, including any adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Time.
The original (Contract Price) was $
Net change by previously authorized Change Orders $
The (Contract Price) prior to this Change Order was $
The (Contract Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order $
The new (Contract Price) including this Change Order will be $
The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ( ) Days.
The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is
AUTHORIZED SIGNATURES:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CONTRACTOR OWNER
BY BY
TITLE TITLE
DATE DATE
EXHIBIT "A?1"
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Division of Facilities Services
Construction Contract Change Order Forms
Instructions to Change Order Documentation
Facilities Services (“FS”) has created this Standard Change Contract Change Order Request and
Change Order Summary Forms to facilitate preparation of contract change orders in conformity
with construction contract requirements. The forms have been prepared to comply with contract
requirements presented in the General Conditions, dated March 2012.
The Change Order Request form shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in
preparing their cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work. The Contractor
shall submit to the Owner the Change Order Summary Form with all associated back?up
documentation.
Direct Cost of the Work:
1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman
necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate
documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General
Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of
work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason,
backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be
included. Supervisory personnel on the job?site, but with broad supervisory
responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor
2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to
perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic
yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc.
3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the
change. For company?owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental
rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed.
Bond Premiums
The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate shall be added to all direct and
indirect costs of the proposed change.
Overhead & Profit
The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of
the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A?1"
EXHIBIT "A?1"
SCHEDULE OF VALUES FOR CONTRACT PAYMENTS EXHIBIT "B" (Based on Original Estimate) Name of Contractor Project Title Total Cost Item Description Unit of Labor Material Other Cost of Per No. of Item Quantity Measure Cost Cost Costs Item Unit (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) TOTALS $ $ $ $ $ NOTE: Each Allowance must be listed as a Separate Item. Approved: Contractor Date Architect Date Owner Date
FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "C"
FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS
Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name
Day of 20 By:
Title:
Date Contract Date
Project Contract Price
Address Net Extras and Deductions
City Adjusted Contract Price
County Amount Previously Paid
State Balance Due ? Final Payment
The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all
labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above
Project in accordance with the Contract.
In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $
being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release
the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon
improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the
Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor,
services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the
Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows:
.
The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute
this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has
properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a
good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and
services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions,
holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the
Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have
been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully?paid or open stock or were fully
paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice.
The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses
(including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the
below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors.
In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or
Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law
whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant
thereto.
The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and
installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will
remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract.
EXHIBIT "D"
EXHIBIT "D"
EXHIBIT "E"
GUARANTEE
Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell
University dated , we hereby guarantee
the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free
(Project Title)
from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from
, the date of acceptance by the Owner.
(Date)
(COMPANY)
By:
Title:
EXHIBIT "F"
FORM I
1
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN
Use of MBE and WBE Vendors
Please print or type all information,
except where a signature is required.
PROJECT:
Amount of Contract: $
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Telephone Number (Including Area Code): Trade:
1. List previous Cornell University work done by your firm:
2. Do you intend to subcontract any work on this project? Yes No
A. What is the total dollar value of work you intend to subcontract?
Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $
3. Do you intend to purchase supplies and/or use vendor services?
A. What is the total dollar value of your intended purchase and/or vendor?
Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $
4. List the work you plan to subcontract in area A. below and list the items you propose to purchase
and/or vendor services you propose to use in area B. Use additional sheet(s) if required.
A. Trade Amount of Work to be B. Supplies and/or Vendor Services
Subcontracted
Trade Amount Item Amount
$ $
$ $
$ $
EXHIBIT "F"
FORM I
2
5. Indicate by dollar value and percentage of contract, the total of your goal for minority and female
vendors and subcontractor participation including your goal for purchases and services. (The
percentage given should be a percentage of your total contract amount.
MBE Amount $ AND Percentage %
WBE Amount $ AND Percentage %
6. Indicate your goal for minority participation in the labor force by dollar value and percentage of
total monthly manpower per trade.
MBE Amount $ AND Percentage %
WBE Amount $ AND Percentage %
7. List MBE and WBE vendors utilized by your firm over the past five (5) years:
MBE or WBE Vendor
CONTRACT
(Indicate which) ADDRESS PROJECT TRADE AMOUNT
This space provided for any comments your organization may have regarding the utilization of MBE and
WBE vendors:
OFFICER OF PRIME CONTRACT BIDDER:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "F"
FORM II
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN
Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE
Subcontractors and Vendors
Please print or type all information,
except where a signature is required.
PROJECT:
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE
Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of
(Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc.
(Use additional sheet if necessary)
OFFICER OF FIRM:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "F" FORM III
EXHIBIT "F" FORM IV CORNELL UNIVERSITY Please print or type all information. PROJECT PRIME CONTRACTOR MINORITY ( WOMEN UTILITZATION REPORT DATE Dollar Dollar % of Dollar % of Prime Contractor, Craft Amount Amount Prime Amount Prime Subcontractor and and/or of Minority Firm of Total Women Firm of Total Sub?Subcontractor's Name Trade Subcontract Name ? Awards Trade MBE Contract Contract Name ? Awards Trade WBE Contract Contract TOTALS $ $ $
EXHIBIT "G"
EXHIBIT "H"
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 1 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division01 General Re quirements Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Wood furring and grounds.
3. Plywood backboards and backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5
inches nominal in least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include
the following:
1. NELMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factoryfabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application
details.
1. Provide submittal product data and for woodpres ervative treatment from
chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that
treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative
used and net amount of preservative retained.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 2 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and
design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review..
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of
engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no
grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable
rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide
lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect
and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by
DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,
they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or
evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for
Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with
allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or
exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2.2 WOODPRESERVATIVETREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that
is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water
may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 3 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kilndry lumber after treatment to a maximum moi sture content of 19 percent. Do
not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for
untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by
the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry or concrete.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber
with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content
and[ any of] the following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;
Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3
grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to
eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut
lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of
other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with
no knots capable of producing bentover nails and d amage to paneling.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 4 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, ACX
grade, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4inch nominal
thickness. Paint all surfaces and edges of plywood with 2 coats fire retardant
paint, Benjamin Moore, super spec, HP latex flat, fire retardant paint or approved
equal. Color light gray.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with
requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure
preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with
hotdip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 15 3M.
2. For Plywood Backboards Panels for Telecommunications Equipment Rooms,
counter sink wood to provide recessed anchor heads. Also refer to
Architectural Partition Detail Drawing, typical.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. PowerDriven Fasteners: NES NER272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated
below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load
imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbonsteel components, zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to
line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as
needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar
supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 5 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing
materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for
fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities.
E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with
installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with
defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use
with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of
preservativetreated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid
water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid
water.
G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER272 for powerdriven fasteners (NOTE: Do not use powder
activated fastening systems on campus in occupied buildings)
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
H. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that
will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of
members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 6 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
C. Where woodpreservativetreated lumber is instal led adjacent to metal decking,
install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressurep reservativetreated, key
beveled lumber not less than 11/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring
face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds
when no longer required.
END OF SECTION 061000
June 29, 2012
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S
FOR
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
PHASE 2C
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853
June 29, 2012
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION PAGE
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
Subsection 1.1 Work Under Contract 01 11 00-1
01 21 00 ALLOWANCES
Subsection 1.1 Related Documents 01 21 00-1
1.2 Description of Requirements 01 21 00-1
1.3 Schedule of Allowances 01 21 00-2
01 22 00 UNIT PRICING
Subsection 1.1 Related Documents 01 22 00-1
1.2 Description of Requirements 01 22 00-1
1.3 Schedule of Unit Prices 01 22 00-1
01 23 00 ALTERNATES
Subsection 1.1 Related Documents 01 23 00-1
1.2 Description of Requirements 01 23 00-1
1.3 Schedule of Alternates 01 23 00-1
01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 25 00-1
1.2 Products List 01 25 00-1
1.3 Contractor's Options 01 25 00-1
1.4 Substitutions 01 25 00-1
1.5 Contractor's Representation 01 25 00-3
1.6 Architect's Duties 01 25 00-3
01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 31 19-1
1.2 Pre-Construction Meeting 01 31 19-1
1.3 Progress Meetings 01 31 19-3
01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Subsection 1.1 General 01 32 16-1
1.2 Form of Schedules 01 32 16-1
1.3 Content of Schedules 01 32 16-1
1.4 Progress Revisions 01 32 16-2
1.5 Submissions 01 32 16-3
1.6 Distribution 01 32 16-3
1.7 Stand Down and Restricted Work Dates 01 32 16-3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 2
June 29, 2012
01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHS
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 32 33-1
3.1 Progress Photographs 01 32 33-1
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Subsection 1.1 General 01 33 00-1
1.2 Shop Drawings 01 33 00-1
1.3 Product Data 01 33 00-2
1.4 Samples 01 33 00-2
1.5 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 01 33 00-3
1.6 Coordination Drawings 01 33 00-4
1.7 Contractor Responsibilities 01 33 00-4
1.8 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-5
1.9 Resubmission Requirements 01 33 00-7
1.10 Architect's Duties 01 33 00-7
1.11 Distribution 01 33 00-8
01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 29-1
1.2 Contractors Safety Plan 01 35 29-1
1.3 Asbestos & Lead 01 35 29-1
1.4 Site Visits 01 35 29-2
Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist
01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 43-1
1.2 Related Sections 01 35 43-1
1.3 Submittals 01 35 43-1
1.4 Job Site Administration 01 35 43-1
1.5 Noise and Vibration 01 35 43-2
1.6 Dust Control 01 35 43-2
1.7 Protection of the Environment 01 35 43-2
1.8 Temporary Re-Routing of Piping and Ductwork 01 35 43-3
1.9 Hazardous or Toxic Materials 01 35 43-3
1.10 Disposal of Waste Material and Title 01 35 43-4
Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan
Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan
01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
Subsection 1.1 Spill Prevention 01 35 44-1
1.2 Spill Control Procedures 01 35 44-1
1.3 Spill Reporting and Documentation 01 35 44-3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 3
June 29, 2012
01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 45-1
1.2 Submittals 01 35 45-1
1.3 Record Documents 01 35 45-1
3.1 Leak Testing 01 35 45-2
3.2 Demolition Procedure for Equipment Removed
by Contractor 01 35 45-3
01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Subsection 1.1 Permits and Licenses 01 41 00-1
1.2 Inspections 01 41 00-1
1.3 Compliance 01 41 00-1
1.4 Owner’s Requirements 01 41 00-1
01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 45 00-1
1.2 Control of On-Site Construction 01 45 00-1
1.3 Control of Off-Site Operations 01 45 00-2
1.4 Testing 01 45 00-2
1.5 Owner's Representative 01 45 00-2
01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
Subsection 1.1 General 01 45 29-1
1.2 Qualifications of Laboratory 01 45 29-1
1.3 Laboratory Duties 01 45 29-2
1.4 Limitations of Authority of Testing Laboratory 01 45 29-3
1.5 Contractor's Responsibilities 01 45 29-3
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 50 00-1
1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 50 00-1
2.1 Materials, General 01 50 00-1
2.2 Temporary First Aid Facilities 01 50 00-1
2.3 Temporary Fire Protection 01 50 00-1
2.4 Construction Aids 01 50 00-2
2.5 Temporary Enclosures 01 50 00-2
2.6 Temporary Water Control 01 50 00-3
2.7 Tree and Plant Protection 01 50 00-3
2.8 Guardrails and Barricades 01 50 00-4
2.9 Access Roads and Parking Areas 01 50 00-4
2.10 Project Identification and Signs 01 50 00-4
2.11 Security 01 50 00-4
2.12 Field Offices and Sheds 01 50 00-5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 4
June 29, 2012
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS (Continued)
Subsection 3.1 Preparation 01 50 00-5
3.2 General 01 50 00-5
3.3 Removal 01 50 00-6
01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 51 00-1
1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 51 00-1
2.1 Materials, General 01 51 00-1
2.2 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Water 01 51 00-1
2.3 Temporary Use of Elevator 01 51 00-2
2.4 Temporary Heat and Ventilation 01 51 00-2
2.5 Temporary Contractor Telephone Service 01 51 00-3
2.6 Temporary Sanitary Facilities 01 51 00-3
3.1 Removal 01 51 00-3
01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Subsection 1.1 General 01 66 00-1
1.2 Transportation and Handling 01 66 00-1
1.3 Storage 01 66 00-1
1.4 Protection 01 66 00-2
1.5 Protection After Installation 01 66 00-3
01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 73 29-1
1.2 Submittals 01 73 29-2
1.3 Quality Assurances 01 73 29-2
1.4 Warranties 01 73 29-4
2.1 Materials 01 73 29-4
3.1 Inspection 01 73 29-4
3.2 Preparation 01 73 29-4
3.3 Performance 01 73 29-5
3.4 Cleaning 01 73 29-7
01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSE OUT
Subsection 1.1 Project Close Out Inspections 01 77 00-1
1.2 Final Clean-Up 01 77 00-1
1.3 Maintenance Stock 01 77 00-2
01 78 22 INVENTORIES
Subsection 1.1 Fixed Equipment Inventory 01 78 22-1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 5
June 29, 2012
01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 23-1
1.2 Form of Submittals 01 78 23-1
1.3 Content of Manual 01 78 23-1
1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes 01 78 23-3
1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems 01 78 23-3
1.6 Submittal Schedule 01 78 23-6
1.7 Instructions of Owner's Personnel 01 78 23-6
01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 36-1
1.2 Submittal Requirements 01 78 36-1
1.3 Form of Submittals 01 78 36-1
1.4 Time of Submittals 01 78 36-2
1.5 Submittals Required 01 78 36-2
01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 39-1
1.2 Maintenance of Documents and Samples 01 78 39-1
1.3 Recording 01 78 39-1
1.4 Submittal 01 78 39-3
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00
Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT
GENERAL
A. Work to be Done
1. Comprehensive building pathways and wiring upgrade for voice and data/LAN
cable plant in Caldwell Hall, Day Hall, Savage/Kinzelberg Complex, and
Schwartz CTR Performing Arts at Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
2. Related documents: “AMEP” & “T” series drawings. Divisions 0 through 1 of
the Project Manual, Divisions 2-28 of the CU-NCP standard technical
specifications and the standard installation details book.
3. Provide new raceway and conduits for complete pathway system as indicated
on the contract documents. Provide electrical work in the new
Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) spaces, as detailed in the contract
documents. Provide labor to move furniture, shelving and other moveable
objects where required for the installation of communications pathways.
4. Seal, patch and paint new and existing fire rated assembly breaches. Patch and
paint walls, ceilings and floors affected by new raceways and conduit work and
removals of “same”. Contractor shall subcontract patching of fire rated
assemblies (exterior of new pathways) and all other patching and painting, as
required.
5. Provide power distribution, grounding riser, fire alarm and lighting upgrades in
the new TRs, as detailed in the contract documents. Provide all required
pathways, coring, etc. that are related to these rooms as shown on the contract
documents.
6. Telecommunications Demolition: Provide removal of all existing voice and
data/LAN cabling except where noted. After voice and data cutovers are
complete, provide removal of all newly decommissioned cable plant unless
otherwise noted on the contract documents. Separate and recycle metallic
cabling and components and other materials to the largest extent possible, as
requested by Cornell. Coordinate a strategy for removals that minimizes
occupant disruption and furniture moving. Coordinate a strategy for re-location
and removal of Verizon services. Subcontract and coordinate
furniture/furnishing relocations to allow for division 26 & 27 work, if required.
Provide qualified tradesman for patching and painting for any touch up repairs
to damage cause by their work. Contract requires close coordination for
removal of raceway systems. Some removals cannot be accomplished until the
end of the project to maintain parallel services and cutover transitioning.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
7. Provide the following for each of the buildings listed below:
a. Caldwell Hall: Provide approximately 281 category 6 and 15 category 6A
cables to be used for voice, data and wireless LAN access point services,
200 backbone cable pairs and any temporary cabling as required to allow
timely and orderly sequencing of demolition and cutover of existing
systems.
b. Day Hall: Provide approximately 874 Category 6 cables and 67 Category
6A cables to be used for voice, data and wireless LAN access point
services, 12 single-mode interior strands of optical fiber, 400 backbone
cable pairs, and any temporary cabling as required to allow timely and
orderly sequencing of demolition and cutover of existing systems.
c. Savage/Kinzelberg Complex: Provide approximately 362 category 6 and
21Category 6A cables to be used for voice, data and wireless LAN access
point services, and any temporary cabling as required to allow timely and
orderly sequencing of demolition and cutover of existing systems.
d. Schwartz CTR Performing Arts: Provide approximately 243 category 6
and 9 Category 6A cables to be used for voice, data and wireless LAN
access point services, 18 single/multi-mode interior strands of optical fiber
100 backbone cable pairs, and any temporary cabling as required to allow
timely and orderly sequencing of demolition and cutover of existing
systems.
8. Provide all horizontal, vertical and backbone pathways and penetrations.
Pathways provided will comprise a complete raceway system as indicated on
the contract documents.
9. Provide fire stop for exterior of all conduits, sleeves and raceway wall and
floor penetrations, including fire stop for all removed raceways & conduits.
10. All cabling shall be installed in a communications pathway system from the TR
to the work area. The contractor shall provide fire stop for interior ends of all
conduits, sleeves and raceway wall and floor penetrations. The contractor shall
coordinate a strategy for the removal of legacy cabling and installation of new
cable plant with the intent to maintain parallel systems. Existing voice/ data
services and departmental security systems shall remain complete and
operational during construction.
11. Telecommunication Room (TR) construction (shell space), mechanical
systems, electrical distribution systems, plywood backboards, TGB grounding
system, fire alarm and lighting upgrades shall be included in this contract as
detailed on the drawings and specifications The contractor shall provide fit out
of the Telecommunications Rooms (TRs), including equipment racks, cable
management hardware, cable runway, rack mount termination equipment for
Category 6 and 6A cable, wall and rack mount termination equipment for
Category 3 backbone copper cable, optical fiber termination hardware, and
final bonding of all metallic components in said equipment rooms. Coordinate
the installation with the Owner and the Owner’s contractor.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
12. Provide 100% testing and certification of media installed under this contract,
including all backbone copper pairs, all fiber strands and all Category 6 and 6A
UTP cables installed.
13. Provide coordination with Owner for proper cutover sequencing, especially for
voice circuits, existing building fiber connections and connection to adjacent
building and areas where demolition and new work must be completed
simultaneously. Work and schedule planning should be coordinated with
Connell Information Technologies (CIT) to minimize disruption in the
building. Work is to broken out by TR serving zone. Sequencing of work
should enable CIT to perform cutover to new infrastructure within days of
cable installation.
B. System Installers
1. The Contractor will use Certified Panduit Installers (PCI) and will provide the
Panduit Certification Plus System Warranty.
2. Corning Cable Systems' network of LANscape® Extended Warranty Program (EWP)
installers will provide the EWP certification. For further information see:
http://www.panduit.com/stellent/groups/marketing-
warranty/documents/warrantyinformation/104516.pdf
http://www.corning.com/cablesystems/nafta/en/programs_distributors/lans
cape/ewp.aspx
C. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the
furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of
the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site,
joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete,
functioning entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but
which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be
included.
D. Intent of Contract Documents
1. The use of the word (or words):
a. "provide" means furnish, install and connect ready for use;
b. "furnish" means supply and deliver to job or where directed;
c. "as approved" or "approved" means Architect’s or Owner’s approval;
d. "as directed" means Owner's direction or instruction;
e. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on
Drawings are directions given to the Contractor;
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-4
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
f. "concealed" means Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind
furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable;
g. "exposed" means all Work not identified as concealed.
2. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other
Drawings.
3. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is
in accordance with following abbreviations:
a. ACI American Concrete Institution
b. AGA American Gas Association
c. AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.
d. AIA American Institute of Architects
e. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
f. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Associates, Inc.
g. ANSI American National Standards Institute
h. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
i. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
j. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
k. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
l. AWSC American Welding Society Code
m. AWWA American Water Works Association
n. BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International
o. IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers
p. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
q. NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters
r. NEC National Electric Code
s. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
t. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
u. SBI Steel Boiler Institute
v. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
w. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
x. UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization
y. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
4. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification
Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition,
amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these
Contract Documents.
5. Install All Work in Compliance with:
a. Building Code of New York State
b. National Electric Code
c. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
d. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
e. All local ordinances
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-5
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
f. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to
same.
E. Use of the Site
1. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least
interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency
vehicles at all times.
2. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane
of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with
radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic
lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross
open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including
pedestrian bridges.
3. The Contractor shall post flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction
operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
4. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent
highways, roadways and footpaths, and shall conform to all laws and regulations
concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of
heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or
equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or
approved by the Owner’s Representative.
5. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on
permanent roadways due to the Work.
6. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on
the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
7. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed
in other than the defined areas, including operations involving delivery and removal
of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the
Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption
of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
8. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the
work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such
repair work shall include reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the
Contractor's Guaranty of Work.
9. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or
as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only
with prior approval of the Owner's Representative.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-6
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
F. Parking
1. The Owner will designate an area for Contractor parking. The Contractor shall make
all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation from the designated parking
area to the construction site as necessary.
2. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus.
The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the
Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Tom Theimer) for
additional information.
3. Contractor shall cooperate with Cornell Police and/or other police authorities having
jurisdiction, as follows:
a. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material
suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence
or the designated parking area.
b. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
c. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
d. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area
and the construction site.
4. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area all temporary trailers, rubbish,
unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the
Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the
property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition,
and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at
the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
G. Changeovers and Continuity of Services
1. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would
affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent areas services at approved times that
will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before
proceeding.
2. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the
building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
3. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours
at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of
normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime
expenses.
4. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical
facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-7
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
5. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility
without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major shutdowns of
utilities will be performed by Cornell University, paid for by the Contractor, to
enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as
those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits.
6. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out
for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if
necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell
Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. All
shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and
requests shall be submitted in writing to the Owner’s Representative.
7. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL
911 IMMEDIATELY.
H. Obstacles, Interference and Coordination
1. General
a. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated
and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
b. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting,
changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work,
equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and
Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate
work to obstacles and interferences encountered.
c. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. All Request
for Information shall be submitted via MasterLibrary. If requested, submit
drawings detailing all such deviations or changes as attachments to the Request
for Information form.
d. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building
equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and
shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given
dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings,
indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall
familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such
equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view
mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been
identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the
Architect.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-8
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
2. Interference
a. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering
with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc.
Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other
equipment requiring frequent attention.
I. Equipment Arrangements
1. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of
construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design
equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
2. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which
differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following
conditions:
a. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and
showing maintenance and service space required.
b. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work
of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports,
pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional
control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for
proper operation of revised layout, and assume responsibility for proper
location of roughing in and connections by other trades.
c. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure
loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient
clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment
which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
J. Supports
1. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all
required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly
support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the
Architect.
K. Existing Equipment, Materials, Fixtures, Etc.
1. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall
submit complete list to Owner. Carefully remove and salvage all items that Owner
wishes to retain shall be delivered to building storage where directed by Owner.
Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally
disposed of.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-9
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
L. Examination of Premises, Drawings, Etc.
1. Before Submitting Proposal
a. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to
determine scope and relation to other work.
b. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and
Specifications, by visiting site and/or building.
c. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
2. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
a. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
b. Inspect all adjacent work.
3. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
a. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying
Drawings.
b. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for
alleged misunderstanding.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 21 00
Ithaca, New York ALLOWANCES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section describes Allowances to be carried in the Base Bid by the Contractor.
B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods
to achieve the Work described herein. Selected materials and equipment are specified in
the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of
additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later
date when additional information is available for evaluation.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition: An allowance is an amount determined by the Owner or calculated by the
Contractor based on given quantities and stated on the Bid Form.
B. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary
to ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated
into the Project.
C. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal
on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final
measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting
losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the
allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order
amount or the Contractor’s handling, labor, installation, overhead and profit. Submit
claims within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction
Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. The Owner will reject claims
submitted later than twenty-one (21) days after such authorization.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Allowances" is included at the end of this Section. Included as
part of each allowance are miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
allowance.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. ALLOWANCE NO. 1:
Provide allowances for owner requested changes in the amounts indicated
below for each building in the bid package.
a. Caldwell Hall: $5,000
b. Day Hall: $10,000
c. Savage/Kinzelberg Complex: $5,000
d. Schwartz CTR Performing Arts: $5,000
B. ALLOWANCE NO. 2:
Provide allowances for “shut downs as described in section 01 11 00_F. 5 in the
amounts indicated below for each building in the bid package.
a. Caldwell Hall: $5,000
b. Day Hall: $5,000
c. Savage/Kinzelberg Complex: $5,000
d. Schwartz CTR Performing Arts: $5,000
C. ALLOWANCE NO. 3:
Provide allowances sprinkler system recertification in the amounts indicated
below for each building in the bid package.
a. Caldwell Hall: $5000
b. Day Hall: $5,000
c. Savage/Kinzelberg Complex: $5000
d. Schwartz CTR Performing Arts:$3000
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 21 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 22 00
Ithaca, New York UNIT PRICING
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY UNIT PRICING 01 22 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section describes Unit Pricing requested by the Owner.
B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods
to achieve the Work described herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition: Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price
per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract
Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract
Documents are increased or decreased.
B. Procedures: All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item,
together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing,
dewatering and other incidental work. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the
item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or
subcontractor in connection therewith.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price 1
Provide price for two category 6 cables installed to an outlet location. Installation shall
include placement, terminations, permanent link testing, faceplate connectors, printed
labels manufacturer’s warranty, as-built documentation, and fire stop for complete
installation excludes pathways, raceway and patching/painting.
B. Unit Price 2
Provide price for one category 6A cable installed to an outlet location. Installation shall
include, placement, terminations, permanent link testing, faceplate connectors hook and
loop wraps printed labels manufactures warranty, as-built documentation, and fire stop for
complete installation excludes conduit raceway and patching/painting.
C. Unit Price 3
Provide price for one surface mount double gang outlet box. Installation shall include outlet
box, an average of 20’ of SR-2 raceway, cover, one 90 degree fitting, entrance end fitting, a
1.25” wall penetration and fire stopping.
D. Unit Price 4
Provide price for one surface mount double gang outlet box. Installation shall include outlet
box, an average of 20’ of 1”conduit, connectors, supports, and junction box, a 1.25” wall
penetration, fire stopping and painting of the exposed conduit.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY UNIT PRICING 01 22 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
E. Unit Price 5
Provide price for one recessed mount double gang outlet box. Installation shall include
outlet box, an average of 20’ of 1”conduit, connectors, supports, and junction box, a 1.25”
wall penetration, fire stopping.
F. Unit Price 6
Provide price per linear foot of J-Hook pathway. Installation shall include manufactures
recommended supporting devices and J-hooks installed at frequency of one per four linear
feet. Price shall exclude cost of installing cables.
G. Unit Price 7
Provide price per linear foot of 1” EMT conduit installed to include all required uni-strut
support, clamps, offsets, elbows, fittings and painting and patching.
H. Unit Price 8
Provide price per linear foot of 2” EMT conduit installed to include all required uni-strut
support, clamps, offsets, elbows, fittings and painting and patching. Assume that 70% of 2”
conduit installations will not require painting and patching.
I. Unit Price 9
Provide price per linear foot of 4” EMT conduit installed to include all required uni-strut
support, clamps, offsets, elbows and fittings. Assume that 70% of 4” conduit installations
will not require painting and patching.
J. Unit Price 10
Provide price per linear foot of SR-2 (2400 Series) to include cover, supports, and conduit
end fitting.
K. Unit Price 11
Provide price per linear foot of SR-4 (4000 Series) to include cover, supports, and conduit
end fitting.
L. Unit Price 12
Provide price per linear foot of SR-7 (700 Series) to include cover, supports, and conduit
end fitting.
M. Unit Price 13
Provide price for a PB-S to include mounting supports, knock outs and painting and
patching. Assume that 70% of PB-S installations will not require painting and patching.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY UNIT PRICING 01 22 00-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
N. Unit Price 14
Provide price for a PB-M to include mounting supports, knock outs and painting and
patching. Assume that 70% of PB-M installations will not require painting and patching.
O. Unit Price 15
Provide price to drill (1) 5” diameter core. Assume that cores will be through
approximately 6” of concrete, 8” CMU.
P. Unit Price 16
Provide price to drill (1) 3” diameter core. Assume that cores will be through
approximately 6” of concrete, 8” CMU.
Q. Unit Price 17
Provide price to drill (1) 1.25” diameter core. Assume that cores will be through
approximately 6” of concrete, 8” CMU.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 22 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 23 00
Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY ALTERNATES 01 23 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section describes the changes to be made under each Alternative.
B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods
to achieve the Work described herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for
certain items that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner
decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be
completed, or in the product, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods
described in the Contract Documents.
B. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary
to ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated
into the Project.
C. Notification: Immediately following Contract award, prepare and distribute to each party
involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been
accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete
description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Include as part
of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or
required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate.
1.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. NO ALTERNATES
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 23 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1
PROGRAM PRODUCT OPTIONS June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and
conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect using
MasterLibrary a complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard,
by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of
products and manufacturers named.
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or
equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or
manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form
as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no
substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the Instructions
to Bidders.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit a separate request for each substitution using MasterLibrary. Support each request
with:
1. Completed "Data for Evaluation of Materials, Products, and Systems" in an approved
format.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2
PROGRAM PRODUCT OPTIONS June 29, 2012
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with
requirements stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
1) Product description.
2) Reference standards.
3) Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the
date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified
listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
B. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
C. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a
formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the
Owner.
E. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed
substitution.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3
PROGRAM PRODUCT OPTIONS June 29, 2012
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined
that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
2. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for
the product specified.
3. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the
Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete
in all respects.
4. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
may subsequently become apparent.
1.6 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the
Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 31 19
Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Architect will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress
meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting two days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site on campus, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representatives
2. Architect and its professional consultants
3. Major Subcontractors
4. Major suppliers
5. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
2. Critical work sequencing
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
10. Temporary utilities
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
a. Site specific safety plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than weekly throughout the
Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agendum:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades.
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts.
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule.
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
10. Coordination of schedules
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.
12. Maintenance of quality standards
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders.
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its
representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL SECTION 01 32 16
Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, prepare and
submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with
sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the
project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of
Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the
submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar
chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of
construction. Specifically list:
a. Telecom Room construction by location.
b. Riser Pathway installation
c. Horizontal cable pathway installation by Telecom Room
d. Station cable placement, termination and testing by Telecom Room
e. Shut downs
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
f. Owner Equipment installation
g. Other construction work. Other Construction to be defined as work that is not
directly related to a Telecom Room. ex chases, soffits and access panels
h. Removal of old cable systems
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each
month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be
completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement,
moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the
Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based
on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10)
working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review.
Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in
processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to
the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the
Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other contractors.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after
award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after
receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement
of work.
D. Submit one printed copy and one electronic version in MasterLibrary.
E. Progress schedules are to be provided in a Google calendar established by Archi-
Technology.and maintained by the Contractor.
1.6 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Job site file
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the
projections of the schedule.
1.7 STAND-DOWN AND RESTRICTED WORK DATES
Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the
following dates and hours is required.
StandDown Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site):
None
Restricted Work Dates (delivery& demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual):
Friday, May 24, 2013 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work
stop at noon
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-4
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
9am Work Start Dates (No noisy construction activities prior to 9am):
December 2-14, 2012 Study/Exam period
May 5-17, 2013 Study/Exam period
August 6-7, 2013 Study/Exam period
Note: Normal work hours are 11PM-7AM Monday-Saturday except during above noted
restrictions. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours,
the Contractor may submit a detailed written request with reasonable advance notice
to the Owner. The Owner, at its sole discretion, may issue a written modification of
the above. The Contractor is strongly advised not to assume that such a modification
will be granted. If work is permitted outside these hours, the Contractor shall not be
permitted to perform any noise generating activities that could disturb occupants.
As noted, the majority of the work should be completed during “off hours” 11PM-
7AM in order to minimize disruption to building occupants. It will be necessary for
the Contractor to work during normal business hours, 8AM-4PM in some areas of
some buildings due to access restrictions. Permission for work during normal
business hours must be requested and approved by the Owner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL SECTION 01 32 33
Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PHOTOGRAPHIC 01 32 33-1
PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION June 29, 2012
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commence of
Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final
photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Digital photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the
work. The Contractor shall submit all photographs in electronic format to the Owner, no
hard copies are required
B. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date and a description of the view.
C. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review.
The photos shall be entered electronically in MasterLibrary with descriptive information of
the date and location of each photo.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 33***
CORNELL SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the
following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
B. Designate in the construction schedule, or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for
submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled
draftsmen and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop
Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop
Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,
patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Submittal: Submit pdf format drawings in MasterLibrary
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and
instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials
and equipment.
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
5. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required,
eliminate or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to
the Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of
options by Architect is required.
8. Submittals: Submit information in MasterLibrary.
1.4 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or
containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment
devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
C. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect.
5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original
condition.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical
with material or product proposed.
1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer.
3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture.
4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in
material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show
approximate limits of variations.
5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are
submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics
from a range of standard choices.
6. Submittals: Submit two (2) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least
one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at
Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports,
certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require
professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall
cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional,
whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications,
Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be
entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or
approvals performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports
from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or
installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by
manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or
instructions.
F. Submittals: All Submittals shall be submitted via the Submittal Tool on MasterLibrary.
Each Submittal shall be for discreet product or group of products that must be reviewed as
system. Submittal for all products in a specification section will be rejected. Contractor to
submit all information in PDF format and shall be properly classified on the MasterLibrary
Submittal Log.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.6 OORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and
equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan
and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping
including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items
contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as
architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each
coordination drawing submitted in MasterLibrary. Provide coordination drawings for all
corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all
congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure
a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in
any given area of the building.
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior
to transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor
variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and
Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and
verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and
coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact
Documents.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an
authorization for additional work or additional cost.
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the
change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as
approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor
finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such
submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of
inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the
same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule,
agreed to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of
performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of
each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer
periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for
coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor
promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination. Allowing ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each
submittal. Advise the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the
progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be
foreshortened.
An additional 5 working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5,
23 and 26, and for Millwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare
submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in
processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals
Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work
thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's
stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification
of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of
the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract
Documents.
4. Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken.
a. Project name and number.
b. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
c. Contract identification.
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name and address of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Name of supplier.
i. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as
appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
j. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
k. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
l. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
m. A blank space for the Architect’s stamps.
5. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on
previous submittals.
6. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must
specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
C. Submittal Transmittal
1. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
2. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.
3. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract
Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
4. Transmit submittals to Architect using MasterLibrary unless otherwise noted or
directed.
5. Where noted or directed, transmit submittals to Architect’s consultant and forward
copy of transmittal form to Architect.
1.9 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.10 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this
Section.
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp mean the following:
1. "No Exception" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found
and Work may proceed.
2. "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that deviations from the design concept which
have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
3. "Revise and Resubmit" or “Rejected” indicates that Work covered by submittal,
including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise
or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay.
Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
C. Informational Submittals: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality
Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will
not require responsive action by the Architect.
1. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
2. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with
Contract Documents.
D. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without
action.
F. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.11 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reproductions of reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with
construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 29
Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The
requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors
involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local,
state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the
requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but
in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such
requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY PLAN
A. The Contractor will submit a site Safety Plan for review by Cornell University before
commencement of work on the site. The safety plan should address site specific safety
concerns related directly to the Work being done. The following safety plan review
checklist is provided to assist contractors in tailoring their safety plan to the Work. Safety
plans that inadequately address safe operations and equipment will be returned for
resubmission. Failure to submit an appropriate site safety plan may result in denial of the
payment.
1.3 ASBESTOS AND LEAD
A. Attached for the Contractor’s information are lead based paint and asbestos reports which
represent samples taken within the building.
B. Removal and disposal of material containing asbestos shall be performed by the Owner
under separate contract.
C. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance
with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the
presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the
Contractor’s means and/or methods. Lead was a common ingredient in paint until 1978.
Caldwell Hall was constructed in 1913, Day Hall was constructed in 1947Savage Hall/
Kinzelberg Hall was constructed in 1948 and 1988 and Schwartz CTR Performing Arts was
constructed in 1988. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific,
indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard
1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the
particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and
the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.4 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects and/or Engineers or Owner shall not
be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety
of all persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them
responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe
access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
Jobsite Name: Date:
Job No: General Contractor:
Jobsite Location: Subcontractor:
Scope of Work: Prime Contractor:
Completed by: Shops:
Applies Designated
to this Competent
Contractor? Person
Standard Y/N (employee name)
Subpart C - General Provisions
1926.20 - .35
Subpart D - Occupational Health & Environmental. Controls
1926.50 - .66
Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, Mists
1926.55
Lead
1926.62
Subpart E - Personal Protective Equipment
1926.95 - .107
Subpart F – Fire Protection & Prevention
1926.150 - .159
Subpart G – Signs, Signals and Barricades
1926.200 - .203
Subpart H – Materials Handling, Storage, Use & Disposal
1926.250 - .252
Subpart I – Tools – Hand & Power
1926.300 - .307
Subpart J – Welding & Cutting
1926.350 - .354
Job Specific
Safety Manual Checklist
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-4
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
Applies Designated
to this Competent
Contractor? Person
Standard Y/N (employee name)
Subpart K – Electrical
1926.400 - .449
Subpart L – Scaffolds
1926.450 - .454
Subpart M – Fall Protection
1926.500 - .503
Subpart Q – Concrete & Masonry Construction
1926.700 - .706
Subpart R – Steel Erection
1926.750 - .761
Subpart S – Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, & Compressed Air
1926.800 - .804
Subpart T – Demolition
1926.850 - .860
Subpart U – Blasting & Use of Explosives
1926.900 - .914
Subpart V – Power Transmission & Distribution
1926.950 - .960
Subpart X – Stairways & Ladders
1926.1050 - .1060
Recordkeeping –
1926.1091 - .1092
Subpart Z – Toxic and Hazardous Substances
1926.1100 - .1152
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1
PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS June 29, 2012
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the
protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall
apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and
regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this
contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed
such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood
to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s
Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control
B. Section 01 35 45 – Refrigerant Compliance
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Waste Disposal Plan.
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory
representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site during all working
hours.
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this
Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested
by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner.
There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so
directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not
comply with these specifications.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2
PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS June 29, 2012
1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of
noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by
construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines
and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction
equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to
meet these requirements.
1.6 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation,
backfilling, loading, or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based
materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout
the duration of construction.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately
controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not
take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ
alternative means to control dust.
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including
mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the
protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the
containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in
conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA.
1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other
employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent
Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and
state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of
work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to:
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or
sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal
and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream
corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm
sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3
PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS June 29, 2012
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property,
unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications
or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any
drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning
operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to
the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part
703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local
sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge
of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s
Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill
Control Procedures.
1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of
piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-
routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing.
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact
air emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of
mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any
existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the
Owner’s Representative.
1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any
other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a
result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and
safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4
PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS June 29, 2012
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University
Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations.
In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety
(EH&S) for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming
into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s
performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and
hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in
accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written
approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit
“Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan
shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD)
companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the
waste material.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions
associated with the form waste descriptions, is attached to this Section. Contractor
must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and
disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For
Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the
proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste
Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its
behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full
records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or
destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all
such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any
instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final
payment(s) under this Contract.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Revision date: May 2010 Page 1 of 2 1. Contractor Name: ________________________ Contact Name/Number/Email: Project Name/Description: Contract No.: Project Start Date: Project End Date: _ CU Project Manager: 2. Check all hazardous materials that will be generated as waste: Category Description Estimated Quantity Source MSDS Available Waste Management Re-Use Transporter Destination or Disposal Location Cornell Contractor CU- Mgt Contractor Mgt EHS Grounds Solvents PCBs Asbestos Lead Mercury Chromium Other Toxic Metals (describe in section 4) Mold Light Bulbs Thermostats Batteries Used Oil Contaminated PPE & Materials Other (describe in section 4) No hazardous waste
Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Revision date: May 2010 Page 2 of 2 3. Check all non-hazardous wastes that will be generated during the project: Category Disposal Facility Name Facility Address Facility Phone Transporter Estimated Quantity C&D Clean soil Non C&D solid waste Other (describe in section IV) No non-hazardous waste will be generated 4. Further description of waste materials expected to be generated during the project: 5. Contractor Certification I, _______________________________________, do hereby certify that I have identified above all waste materials expected to be generated by the Project named in Section 1 and that I will dispose of all such waste materials in a legally permissible manner and location(s), in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. I further certify that I will amend this form as appropriate if I, my representatives, employees or subcontractors become aware of any additional wastes that will be generated by the Project. I further agree to notify the CU Project Manager if I become aware of any legal non-compliance associated with disposal of Project wastes by anyone. _____________________________________________ Contractor Signature Print Name Date 6. Submit completed forms to CU Project Manager. CU Project Manager must submit this completed form to CU Environmental Health and Safety Office before start of work and before the first payment will be made. The completed form will be incorporated as an enforceable part of the contract. Forms can be submitted electronically to EHS at mailto:ehsdir-mailbox@cornell.edu or via campus mail to EHS attn: Waste Plans, East Hill Office Building.
Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan:
The following is not solid waste: Discarded materials that are being beneficially used pursuant to
6NYCRR Section 360-1.15
A material is disposed of if it is discharged, deposited, injected, dumped, spilled, leaked or placed
into or on any land or water so that such material or any constituent thereof may enter the
environment or be emitted into the air or discharged into groundwater or surface water.
Asbestos: Any waste material containing the asbestiform varieties of: Chrysotile (serpentine);
crocidolite (riebeckite); amosite (cum- mingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite.
Batteries: All spent batteries being disposed that are regulated by New York State Department of
Environmental Conservation (NYDEC) in 6 New York Code of Rules and Regulations (NYCRR)
Part 374-3, or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
273.2 as Universal Waste Batteries.
Borrow Material: Fill material required for on-site construction that is obtained from other
locations.
Chromium: Any waste containing chromium or contaminated with chromium that exceeds the
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for chromium as defined in 6 NYCRR Part
371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24.
Clean Soil: Soil that is uncontaminated with any solid or hazardous waste, C&DDebris, trees,
stumps, yard waste or wood chips per definitions of those terms below.
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris: Uncontaminated solid waste resulting from the
construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads; and uncontaminated
solid waste resulting from land clearing. Such waste includes, but is not limited to bricks, concrete
and other masonry materials, soil, rock, wood (including painted, treated and coated wood and wood
products), land clearing debris, wall coverings, plaster, drywall, plumbing fixtures, non-asbestos
insulation, roofing shingles and other roof coverings, asphaltic pavement, glass, plastics that are not
sealed in a manner that conceals other wastes, empty buckets ten gallons or less in size and having no
more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom, electrical wiring and components containing
no hazardous liquids, and pipe and metals that are incidental to any of the above. Solid waste that is
not C&D debris (even if resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of
utilities, structures and roads and land clearing) includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, garbage,
corrugated container board, electrical fixtures containing hazardous liquids such as fluorescent light
ballasts or transformers, fluorescent lights, carpeting, furniture, appliances, tires, drums, containers
greater than ten gallons in size, any containers having more than one inch of residue remaining on the
bottom and fuel tanks. Specifically excluded from the definition of construction and demolition debris
is solid waste (including what otherwise would be construction and demolition debris) resulting from
any processing technique, other than that employed at a department-approved C&D debris processing
facility, that renders individual waste components unrecognizable, such as pulverizing or shredding.
Also, waste contained in an illegal disposal site may be considered C&D debris if the department
determines that such waste is similar in nature and content to C&D debris.
Construction and Demolition Debris Processing Facility means a processing facility that receives
and processes construction and demolition debris by any means.
Contaminated PPE & Materials: Any personal protective equipment such as gloves, coveralls,
boot covers, respirator cartridges etc.; or rags, tools, articles or other material that has become
adulterated by a hazardous material, and which meets the definition of hazardous waste or is
considered unsuitable for disposal as regular trash.
Exempt C&D and Stump Facilities: The following facilities are exempt from Solid waste
management facility permitting requirements provided the facilities operate only between the hours of
sunrise and sunset, and (if the allowable waste comes from an off-site source) no fee or other form of
consideration is required for the privilege of using the facility for disposal purposes:
(i) A site at which only the following C&D debris is placed: recognizable uncontaminated concrete
and concrete products (including steel or fiberglass reinforcing rods that are embedded in the
concrete), asphalt pavement, brick, glass, soil and rock. (Recognizable means solid waste that can be
readily identified as C&D debris by visual observation.)
(ii) A landfill for the disposal of trees, stumps, yard waste and wood chips generated from these
materials is exempt when origin and disposal of such waste occur on properties under the same
ownership or control.
Hazardous Waste: Any waste material that meets the definition of “hazardous waste” in 6 NYCRR
371.1 and 40 CFR 261.3 and that is not excluded by regulation.
Land Clearing Debris means vegetative matter, soil and rock resulting from activities such as land
clearing and grubbing, utility line maintenance or seasonal or storm-related cleanup such as trees,
stumps, brush and leaves and including wood chips generated from these materials. Land clearing
debris does not include yard waste which has been collected at the curbside.
Lead: Any metallic lead or waste material containing lead, e.g. waste paint chips, that exceed the
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3
or 40 CFR 261.24.
Light Bulbs: All spent lamps or light bulbs being disposed that are regulated in 6 NYCRR Part 374-
3 or 40 CFR 273.5.
Mercury: Liquid mercury or any waste containing mercury at levels exceeding the Toxicity
Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for mercury as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40
CFR 261.24.
Mold: Construction material or debris contaminated with mold fungus that is unsuitable for reuse.
Other Toxic Metals: Any waste containing a metal or contaminated by a metal identified in, and
exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit of 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or
40 CFR 261.24.PCBs: All electrical articles and equipment or the used oil removed from them,
containing polychlorinated biphenyls at levels regulated by 6 NYCRR 371.4(e)
Scrap Metal: Bits and pieces of metal parts (e.g., bars, turnings, rods, sheets, wire) or metal pieces
that may be combined together with bolts or soldering (e.g., radiators, scrap automobiles, railroad box
cars), which when worn or superfluous can be recycled.
Solid Waste (Non C&D): Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water
supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials including solid,
liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from industrial, commercial, mining and
agricultural operations, and from community activities, but does not include solid or dissolved
materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial
discharges that are point sources subject to permit under 33 USC 1342, or source, special nuclear or
by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, except as may be provided by
existing agreements between the State of New York and the government of the United States.
Solvents: Substances (usually liquid) suitable for, or employed in, solution, or in dissolving
something; as, water is the appropriate solvent for most salts, alcohol for resins, ether for fats, and
mercury or acids for metals, etc. Typically these are chemicals are used as paint thinners or cleaning
solutions.
Spoil: Refuse material removed from an excavation.
Used Oil: Any oil refined from crude oil, or any synthetic oil, that has been used, and as a result of
such use is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities. “See 6 NYCRR 374-2 or 40 CFR 279”
Thermostats: Any mercury-containing thermostat as defined in 6 NYCRR 374-3.1(d), or 40 CFR
273.4
Uncontaminated C&D Debris: C&D Debris that is not mixed or commingled with other solid
waste at the point of generation, processing or disposal, and that is not contaminated with spills of a
petroleum product, hazardous waste or industrial waste. Contamination from spills of a petroleum
product does not include asphalt or concrete pavement that has come into contact with petroleum
products through normal vehicle use of the roadway.
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or
hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site
during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide
protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills.
Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar
methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a
temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent
the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any
products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a
manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or
vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in
accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that
is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of
such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential
health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that
could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should
be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any
other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup
procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup
contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel
necessary to cleanup the spill, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, then leave
the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill
reporting (Section 1. 3).
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a
containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available
materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is
present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to
this area.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent
material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of
the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall
not compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes,
etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires,
explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder
blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the
released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as
soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be
identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of
the release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any
operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1)
leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves,
pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall
be initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place
material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect
incompatible or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance
with all applicable state and federal regulations.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has
been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material.
Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a
separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its
proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to cleanup the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change
clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged
through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A
sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel
(e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill
character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate
site and emergency personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and
other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do
so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires,
explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the
site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting
and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups;
(3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255C1111 who will notify the
appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external
reporting, if required.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation
procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1C800C 457C
7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell
Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the
release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill
number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following
criteria apply:
TABLE 1
CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious
structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence.
Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto
surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be
immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or
“harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response
Center, 1C800C424C8802.
Spill Reporting Information. When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to
provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an
indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous
substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment
and the approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or
threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or
responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill
site.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled
material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the
emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed
individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity
(RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then
the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of
the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The
description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of
material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5)
an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures
to be implemented to prevent and control future releases.
1 Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that
triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for
knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response
team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
2 Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water
quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or
cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 45
Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible and accountable for compliance with the EPA
Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 608, 40 CFR Part 82 and any state or local codes for all
refrigerant-related work. In general, an EPA-certified technician shall perform any
activity involving refrigerant-containing equipment that includes: (1) attaching and
detaching hoses and gauges to and from refrigerant containing equipment to measure
pressure; (2) adding refrigerant to, or removing refrigerant from equipment; or (3) any
other activity that violates the integrity of a refrigerant containing circuit (for example
any activity where a refrigerant containing circuit is ‘opened’ in any manner).
B. Refrigerant and oil shall be recovered from any equipment that does not meet the
definition of a small appliance in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F before removal and
subsequent disposal. Small appliances (as defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F) may be
removed from the site with the charge (refrigerant) intact, provided it is properly
labeled and handled in such a manner so as to prevent damage to coils. Small
Appliances are defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F as: Any appliance that is fully
manufactured, charged, and hermetically sealed in a factory with five (5) pounds or less
of a Class I or Class II substance used as a refrigerant, including, but not limited to,
refrigerators and freezers (designed for home, commercial, or consumer use), medical
or industrial research refrigeration equipment, room air conditioners (including window
air conditioners and packaged terminal air heat pumps), dehumidifiers, under-the-
counter ice makers, vending machines, and drinking water coolers.
C. All new equipment installed shall utilize non-CFC refrigerants.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting construction, demolition, or service work Contractor shall provide to
Owner a list of all service technicians with EPA certification numbers and level of
certification. (Copies of EPA certification cards are acceptable for those who will be
working on the site.)
1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Contractor shall provide to the Owners Representative all Service Invoices (or
equivalent service documentation acceptable to owner) for all work performed by EPA-
certified Technicians. Service Invoices (or equivalent documentation) shall include the
following information at a minimum for each piece of refrigerant containing equipment
serviced:
· Date of Service
· Name of EPA-Certified Technician
· Technicians Certification Level
· Type of Equipment Serviced
· Equipment Manufacture
· Equipment Model and Serial Number
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
· Description of Service Performed
· Date Leak Discovered (if applicable)
· Date Leak Repaired (if applicable)
· Date Follow-Up Leak Test Performed (if applicable)
· Type of Refrigerant
· Normal System Full Charge (in pounds)
· Amount of Initial Refrigerant Charge Recovered During Service
· Amount of Recovered Refrigerant Returned to System
· Type of Additional Refrigerant Added to System
· Amount of Additional Refrigerant Charged to System
· System Charge at End of Service
B. Contractor shall provide to Cornell’s Environmental Health and Safety Office and Air
Conditioning & Refrigeration (ACR) Shop, via the Owner’s Representative, complete
equipment documentation including: make, model number, serial number, refrigerant
type and full refrigerant charge (quantity), equipment ID tag number and location
(room number) for all equipment installed that does not meet the definition of a small
appliance (40CFR Part 82).
C. Contractor shall provide Owners Representative a copy of complete manifests,
invoices, or other documentation showing any refrigerant removed from the project by
the contractor was disposed of appropriately or reclaimed by an EPA-certified
Reclaimer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 LEAK TESTING
A. All new equipment not meeting the definition of a small appliance, including packaged
equipment, factory charged, field charged, split systems or field-constructed systems
with field-installed refrigerant piping shall be leak tested prior to or during startup.
Leak testing shall utilize appropriate electronic leak-testing equipment.
B. Leak testing shall be conducted by an EPA-certified technician. The contractor shall
provide written verification of the leak testing and results.
C. If a leak is detected, the following procedure shall be followed:
1. Notify the Owner’s Site Representative (who will notify the Refrigerant
Compliance Coordinator).
2. Document the leak.
3. Repair the leak.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
4. Document the procedures followed.
5. Leak test to verify the leak was repaired.
6. Schedule and provide a 30-day follow-up verification leak test witnessed by a
designated HVAC technician.
7. Document follow-up leak testing.
8. Repeat the above process if follow-up leak is detected.
3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor, in contractor-provided refrigerant recovery cylinders, shall take
ownership of the recovered refrigerant and transport off site to a proper disposal
company or certified reclaimer.
B. Service Invoices, as described in RECORD DOCUMENTS, shall be provided.
C. The Contractor technician shall tag the unit that the refrigerant was removed.
D. Once an EPA-certified technician has removed the refrigerant and tagged the unit, a
non-certified person may perform the remainder of the demolition.
***END OF SECTION 01 35 45***
CORNELL SECTION 01 41 00
Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the
execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall
include but are not limited to building, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe and
building demolition.
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a
structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and
Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall
also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any
demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and
maintained through the City of Ithaca.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all
service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and
regulations applicable to the Work.
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall
comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of
equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the
Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of
business of the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a
summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits
secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 45 00
Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC)
program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those
of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance
and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate
facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control
function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the
construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC
program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Conference. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the
Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. The Contractor shall make
available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. The following
minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
a. Project Manager.
b. Project Field Supervisor
c. Subcontractor
d. Architect’s Representative
e. Owner’s Representative
f. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
g. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any
definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the
supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that
materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check
to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the
work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine
materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and
that the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a
representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing
for compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure
continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular
work.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as
opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be
responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC
Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during
shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in
good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation.
Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an
item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance
of the completed project.
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an
installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship
requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the
work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to
reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in
conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to
make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 45 29
Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-1
PROGRAM SERVICES June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to
perform specified services.
1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its
required services.
2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to
perform the Work of the Contract.
B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited
to the following:
1. New York State Building Code, Section 17, Special Inspections
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY
A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", 1971
edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.
B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-05b, "Standard Specifications for Agencies
Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction".
C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York.
D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional
Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all
testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements.
E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum
of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
F. Testing Equipment:
1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either:
a. National Bureau of Standards
b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-2
PROGRAM SERVICES June 29, 2012
1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES
A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on
notice.
B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of
construction.
1. Comply with specified standards.
2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies
of work or products.
D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that
strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical
Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor and Architect. The Architect
shall determine whether remedial action is necessary.
E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect,
Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.
4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
7. Date of test.
8. Identification of product and specification section.
9. Location of sample or test in the Project.
10. Type of inspection or test.
11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents.
F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been
inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which
have not yet been repaired or resolved.
G. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-3
PROGRAM SERVICES June 29, 2012
1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's
operations.
B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of
materials proposed to be used and for which testing is specified.
C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and
other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.
D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required.
E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be
tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.
F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory
assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse
laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's
responsibility.
G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for
Contractor's convenience.
H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing
laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial
tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 29***
CORNELL SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1
PROGRAM AND CONTROLS June 29, 2012
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities and controls required
by all trades for construction, and remove on completion of Work.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the
Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes,
standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to
render first aid at the site.
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of
the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of
Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. Smoking is prohibited in
all Cornell University buildings.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2
PROGRAM AND CONTROLS June 29, 2012
4. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible
materials and volatile conditions.
5. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection
certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations will be conducted under a Hot Work Permit. Where such
work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good
operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain
prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life
Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to
facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways,
platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings,
for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses, as
necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior
materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized
persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or
locksets.
2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of
materials.
B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building
occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to
prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations
from construction work.
1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which
comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and
standards.
a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with
existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3
PROGRAM AND CONTROLS June 29, 2012
b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and
ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations.
2.6 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free
of water at all times.
B. The Contractor shall:
1. Provide, maintain and operate pumps as required to keep all exterior work, free of
water at all times.
2. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the
Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the
removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.7 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION
A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to
remain, and those adjacent to the site.
B. Consult with Owner to remove agreed upon tree roots and branches which interfere with
construction.
1. Employ or consult with a Certified Arborist to remove, and to treat cuts.
C. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees
and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference
Cornell University Design Standards and Details:
http://cds.pdc.cornell.edu/TableOfContents.html
D. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas:
1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking.
2. Do not store materials or products.
3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water.
E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations
to prevent damage.
F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are
damaged or destroyed due to construction operations.
G. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off
close to the tree side of the excavation.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4
PROGRAM AND CONTROLS June 29, 2012
H. During the leafing-out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce
root damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling
around roots, and backfilling as soon as possible.
I. Trees damaged during construction should be fertilized according to standard tree
maintenance practices.
J. If roots are cut back as a result of construction, proper pruning standards should be
applied to compensate for root loss, while maintaining the natural character of the tree.
2.8 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways and other devices necessary to protect
personnel and employees at the site, and the public, against hazards on or adjacent to the
construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert
persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the site
from public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site as necessary to provide
uninterrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas.
B. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid blockage of
flow from adjacent areas.
C. During dry weather wet down temporary unpaved areas when necessary to prevent blowing
dust.
2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. No signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner.
2.11 SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the
Owner.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5
PROGRAM AND CONTROLS June 29, 2012
2.12 FIELD OFFICES
A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of
the Contractor and Owner.
B. Provide a designated break area within the project site limits to minimize interaction
between construction personnel and the Campus community.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction
procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities
which may be affected by execution of the work.
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other
temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of
the Work.
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by
Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 2 through 28.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the
quality specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work
requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors
employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of
waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its
workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval
of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be
performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least
once a week. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of
mud and construction debris and maintain dust control in compliance with the Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6
PROGRAM AND CONTROLS June 29, 2012
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to
original condition.
1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and
utilities.
2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations
and slopes, and clean the area.
***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 51 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades
for construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and
distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, 2008 edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage,
must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes
and standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing
the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its
operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the
Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points
shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power.
The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as
long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to
meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the
usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event,
the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to
meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor.
C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no
longer required.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be
maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected.
The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and
seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all
egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working
hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National
Electric Code.
E. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or
the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and
cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule
shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges
relating to shutdowns.
F. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the
Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary
service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any
additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the
Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition
satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR
A. Use of Existing Elevator
1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such
equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or
regulation.
b. Provide for the maintenance of the elevator equipment as approved by the
Owner's Representative.
c. Leave such equipment in perfect condition.
2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the
Work.
B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for
temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way
constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written
maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the
equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts,
lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment
to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing.
D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required.
E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside
shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy.
F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of
the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of
drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to
prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project.
2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide direct line telephone/data service at the construction site for the use of personnel
and employees.
B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges.
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during
construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The
Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services
associated with such usage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer
required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to
original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 66 00
Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items
incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in
a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every
source.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obscuring from public view, in a manner acceptable
to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means
and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement or damage.
1.3 STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat
and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or
with the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored
weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area.
The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no
negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area, the
Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid
overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to
exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or
equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
shall move such materials or equipment.
1.4 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may
be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The
Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including
items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of
the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing
utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only.
The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in
advance of its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as
passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected
adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of
all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the
Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks,
gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not
protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as
specified) to satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on
finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any
materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall
have rubber tires on wheels.
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish
flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying
with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the
building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including
but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment,
etc.
1.5 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in
immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of
openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used
by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to
foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of
heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products
will occur.
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces
from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict
use of adjacent unprotected areas.
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including
excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the
Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original
structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. The Contractor shall build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases
and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings, including but
not limited to channels, chases and flues, have been provided the Contractor shall
build in, over, around and finish all such openings as required to complete the
Work.
3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports
required for the execution of the Work.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or
excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety
of any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the
Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work of the schedule indicate a change of products from the
original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 -
Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Contractor shall submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date
and the time the work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that would change their load-carrying capacity of load-deflection ration.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching structural elements.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in
a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut
and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in
increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s
aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut
and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or piece waterproofed walls or floors or
any structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or
repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and
roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to
be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or
guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials,
and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by
general practice to be watertight.
i. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through
foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
b. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce
water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before
installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review
and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make
watertight at no additional cost to the Owner.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with
materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical
materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to
movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or
performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with
the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of
that portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and
properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations
free from water.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least
likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper
surfaces to receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible,
neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished
side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching
of services is required.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate
paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent
finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall
utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the
existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a
uniform visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide
an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing
floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve
uniform color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials
and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-
plane surface of uniform appearance.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable
for new materials.
1 Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain
with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent
settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with
specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed
work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any
structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are
intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such
replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as
they existed.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7
PROGRAM AND REPAIRING June 29, 2012
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar
features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering
to its original condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL SECTION 01 77 00
Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. When the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings,
equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Owner's
Representative shall make a detailed inspection of the Work to insure that all requirements
of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable.
B. A copy of the report of the inspection shall be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection
progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work
found to be incomplete or defective.
C. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the
Contractor shall so advise the Owner's Representative. After receipt of this notification, the
Owner's Representative shall inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection.
A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions,
omissions and incomplete work shall be furnished to the Contractor.
D. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions
and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Owner's Representative shall make an
inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final
inspection.
1.2 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the
completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any
kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion
of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings,
rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used
under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property
and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the
event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the
Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes
cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by
such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and
existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the
entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the
manufacturers of the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing
condition.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement
of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall
replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and
clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
1.3 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall
obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
**END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 22
Ithaca, New York INVENTORIES
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INVENTORIES 01 78 22-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried
in an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be
inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to
the list to the Owner’s Representative via MasterLibrary. The initial data to be captured
on each piece of equipment shall include:
1. Name of Product
2. Equipment Classification
3. Manufacturer
4. Model Number
5. Serial Number
6. Cost
7. Location (including Building and Room Number)
8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation)
C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel
template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and
specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to
the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its
disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using a electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in
close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the
access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects.
E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template
with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The
Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation
(i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INVENTORIES 01 78 22-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST
· Building Equipment
· AC Drive/VSD
· Backflow Preventor
· Air Compressor
· Building
· Sprinkler
· Control
· Vacuum
· Pump
· Condensate
· Glycol
· CWC
· HWC
· Potable
· Sanitary Sewer
· Storm Sewer
· Sump
· Quality Water
· Fuel
· Fan
· Exhaust
· Supply
· Return
· Fan Coil
· VAV Box
· Transfer Switch
· Motor
· Pump
· Fan
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 22***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1
PROGRAM MAINTENANCE DATA June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in
other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed
work.
2. Operations and maintenance data shall be available to the Owner at time of
substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of
equipment and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual and PDF to be entered into
MasterLibrary Submittal Tool, Equipment List and Room Tool for use by Owner's
personnel.
B. Format:
1. PDF’s of product data and manuals shall be formatted to be printed as: 8-1/2" x 11"..
2. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, scanned .pdf with specific product indicated with
an arrow or highlighting and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
3. Drawings:
a. Drawings are required in electronic format.
4. Cover: If information is submitted via MasterLibrary “Binder” set Binder type to:
"OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
C. Binders:
1. To be via Master Library Digital Binders if Submittal, Equipment and Room Tools
are not used.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order on
MasterLibrary.Com.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2
PROGRAM MAINTENANCE DATA June 29, 2012
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in
Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct
illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
E. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3
PROGRAM MAINTENANCE DATA June 29, 2012
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit via MasterLibrary.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the
product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit in MasterLibrary.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4
PROGRAM MAINTENANCE DATA June 29, 2012
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5
PROGRAM MAINTENANCE DATA June 29, 2012
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panelboards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections
of Specifications and General Conditions.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6
PROGRAM MAINTENANCE DATA June 29, 2012
1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submittals to be entered by the Contractor into MasterLibrary sufficiently in advance of
any required review.
B. Once issued the Owners Representative shall acknowledge the submittal via MasterLibrary
within 5 business days.
C. If additional information is required, the submittal will be Opened for Discussion and the
Contractor will receive email notification of any comments entered while the submittal is
Open for Discussion. The Contractor shall promptly respond to any questions or provide
additional information as required.
D. Once all questions related to the submittal have been answered the Owner’s
Representative/Architect will enter a Response and Mark the Submittal Complete.
E. All submittal information will be available via the Submittal Log on MasterLibrary to all
project participants with access to the submittal tool
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and
maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products,
equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating
and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of
operations and maintenance.
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been
instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's
personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY WARRANTIES 01 78 36-1
PROGRAM AND BONDS June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of
the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
B. Number of original copies required: Two (2) each.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for
each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare in duplicate packets.
B. Format:
1. Size 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., punch sheets for 3-ring binder.
a. Fold larger sheets to fit binders.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY WARRANTIES 01 78 36-2
PROGRAM AND BONDS June 29, 2012
2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND
BONDS". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Name of Contractor
C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
1.4 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to
final request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of
acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
1.5 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the
respective sections of Specifications.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for
construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform
Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s
Representative and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
C. Drawings
Record drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract
Drawings using colored ink or pencil, and the construction record drawings shall be kept
current on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable,
the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or
similar reference which cites the reason for the change. The day-to-day construction record
drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review
upon request. The "Record" drawings shall show the following information:
1. all significant changes in plan, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in
location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction;
2. all significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete
reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during
construction;
3. final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and
any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change
Order or job conditions;
4. final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas,
sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing,
including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters,
clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water
drainage; and
5. final location and arrangement of all underground utilities, connections to building
and/or rerouting of existing utilities, including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm,
heating, electric, signal, gas, water and telephone..
6. Final topographic contours of finished earth surfaces, finished grades, streets, etc.
7. Additions to project, elimination of project components, relocation of components.
D. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3
PROGRAM June 29, 2012
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, deliver all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39***
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 1 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division01 General Re quirements
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fireresistancerated walls and floors.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each specific product proposed for use.
B. Division 27 Prime Contractor shall also refer to Section 270500 Basic
Electrical/Communication Requirements, for additional requirements as they
relate to Telecommunications specific means, methods and acceptable
design make products.
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include
location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing
and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration
firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked,
approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fireprotection
engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance
rated assembly.
D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has
been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global
according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been
evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor
Program Requirements."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 2 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration
firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful
performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff,
and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on buyer.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when
ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration
firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written
instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate,
forcedair circulation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that
penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, coredri lled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate penetration firestopping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hilti Corporation.
2. RectorSeal Corporation (BioFireshield)
3. Specified Technologies Inc.
4. 3M Fire Protection Products.
5. USG Corporation.
B. Provide the products of only one manufacturer throughout the project.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 3 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
1. At a minimum these need to conform to Div 27 05 00 acceptable
manufacturers.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke
and other gases, and maintain original fireresista nce rating of construction
penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one
another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B. Penetrations in FireResistanceRated Walls: Pr ovide penetration
firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on
testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. Fireresistancerated walls include firebarrier walls, smokebarrier walls
and fire partitions.
2. FRating: Not less than the fireresistance rat ing of constructions
penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a
positive pressure differential of 0.01inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling
membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. FRating: At least 1 hour, but not less than th e fireresistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
3. TRating: At least 1 hour, but not less than th e fireresistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of
a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per UL 1479.
1. LRating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of
penetration opening at 0.30inch wg (74.7 Pa) at bo th ambient and
elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flamespread and
smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, re spectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system
that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use
only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer
and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping
indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 4 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
a. Slagwoolfiber or rockwoolfiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Firerated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. CastinPlace Firestop Devices: Factoryassembl ed devices for use in cast
inplace concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with
an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the
sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Singlecomponent latex formulat ions that do not reemulsify
after cure during exposure to moisture.
Generally suitable for Division 27 conduit.pathways work
C. Firestop Devices: Factoryassembled collars for med from galvanized steel
and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminumfoil
faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanizedsteel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, waterresistant putties
containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
Generally suitable for Division 27 cabling related work
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Singlecomponent intum escent elastomeric sheets
with aluminum foil on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders,
hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with
water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heatexpanding pillows/b ags consisting of glassfiber
cloth cases filled with a combination of mineralfi ber, waterinsoluble
expansion agents, and fireretardant additives. Wh ere exposed, cover
openings with steelreinforcing wire mesh to protec t pillows/bags from being
easily removed.
Generally suitable for Division 27 cabling work
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, siliconebased liquid elastomers that, when
mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 5 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
J. Silicone Sealants: Singlecomponent, siliconeb ased, neutralcuring
elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (selfleveling) formulation for openings in floors and
other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical
and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag
grade for both opening conditions.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with
penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or
procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing
penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items
foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration
firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration
firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and formrelease agents from con crete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer
using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed
surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the
Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 6 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as
soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's
written installation instructions and published drawings for products and
applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce
crosssectional shapes and depths required to achie ve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove
combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as
permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,
accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fireresistance
ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by
openings and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish
to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by
penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in
which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation
that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce
systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078413
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 1 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, core descriptions, fire8resistance rating, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal
thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and
exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Fire8Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire8protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
C. Smoke8Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 2 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection
during transit and Project8site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory8finished
units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of
frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units
maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum
48inch8 (1028mm8) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps
excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/48inch (68mm) space between each stacked door to permit
air circulation.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field
measurements before fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold8Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot8Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic8Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with minimum A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G)
coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot8dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 3 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot8dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as
measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral8Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 68 to 128
lb/cu. ft. (968 to 1928kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame8spread and smoke8
development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold8applied asphalt mastic, SSPC8Paint 12, compounded
for 158mil (0.48mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert8type noncorrosive
compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious
impurities.
2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel .
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft8paper honeycomb, mineral8
board, or vertical steel8stiffener core.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire8protection and temperature8rise
ratings indicated.
3. Vertical Edges for Single8Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.0428inch8 (1.08mm8)
thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold8rolled steel sheet unless
metallic8coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements
indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty 18 GA.), Model 2
(Seamless).
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with
reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold8 or
hot8rolled steel sheet.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 4 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and
profile.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold8rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.0538inch8 (1.38mm8) thick steel sheet 16
GA..
4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.0538inch8 (1.38mm816 GA) thick steel sheet.
5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.0538inch8 (1.38mm8) thick steel sheet. Same
as adjacent door frame.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with
reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap8and8stirrup or T8shaped anchors to suit frame
size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated
straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or
wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.
2. Stud8Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In8Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum
3/88inch8 (9.58mm8) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide
pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to
frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch
(1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip8type anchors, with two holes to receive
fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable8type anchors with extension
clips, allowing not less than 28inch (508mm) height adjustment. Terminate
bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
2.5 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as
specified for adjoining hollow metal work.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick,
fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 5 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of
5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick,
fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C,
with blades or baffles formed of 0.0208inch8 ((0.58mm8) thick, cold8rolled steel
sheet set into 0.0328inch8 (0.88mm8) thick steel frame.
1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V8shaped or
Y8shaped blades.
2. Fire8Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades
closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire8rated door
assemblies of type and fire8resistance rating indicated by same testing and
inspecting agency that established fire8resistance rating of door assembly.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid
mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch
(0.4 mm) thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's
plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot
be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 .
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep8hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water
penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and
make smooth, flush, and invisible.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 6 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no
visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame.
Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat8 or oval8head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames
to be grouted.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least
four spot welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813
mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm)
high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm)
high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm)
high.
b. Stud8Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813
mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide
and mounted in metal8stud partitions.
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches
(152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26
inches (660 mm) o.c.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather8stripped doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single8Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
b. Double8Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door
silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from
either cold8 or hot8rolled steel sheet.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 7 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified
in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to
ANSI/SDI A250.8 .
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface8
mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and
ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for
hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections
with Division 26 Sections.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline
joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side
of hollow metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so
that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of
interior doors and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of
glazing and type of installation indicated.
2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast8curing, lead8 and chromate8free
primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended
by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field8
applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing8in for embedded and built8in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 8 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded8in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed
finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for
squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a
line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners
of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
perpendicular line from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface8
mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 .
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire8protection8rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of
opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames
have been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are
constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends
to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 9 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder8actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. Metal8Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral8fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling
space between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout.
Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not
deformed or damaged by grout forces.
6. In8Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7. In8Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors,
and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet
on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face
corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within
clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non8Fire8Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):
Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Fire8Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke8Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105 .
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing"
and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat8 or oval8head machine screws spaced
uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches
(50 mm) o.c. from each corner.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 10 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately
before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped,
bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately
after installation.
C. Prime8Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air8drying, rust8
inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic8Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 1 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solidcore doors with woodveneer faces.
2. Factory finished flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for
hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and
edge construction and trim for openings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of
each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location
and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fireprotection ratings for firerated doors.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by
10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm),
with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber
required.
b. Provide samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic
laminate required.
c. Finish veneerfaced door samples with same mater ials proposed for
factoryfinished doors.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 2 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with
WDMA I.S.1A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. Provide WICertified Compliance Certificate indi cating that doors comply
with requirements of grades specified.
2. Provide WICertified Compliance Certificate for installation.
B. FireRated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for firepro tection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42by
84inch (1067by2134mm) section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch
in a 3inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2mm) span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for SolidCore Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 3 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
B. FireProtectionRated Doors: Provide core speci fied or mineral core as
needed to provide fireprotection rating indicated on drawings.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals
concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
2.3 VENEEREDFACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior SolidCore Doors:
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2. Species: White oak.
3. Cut: Rotary cut.
4. Core: Particleboard.
5. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then
entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
6. WDMA I.S.1A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frameopening sizes in dicated. Comply with
clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for firerat ed doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate
hardware to comply with DHIWDHS3. Comply with fi nal hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115W ser ies standards, and
hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions
and alignment before factory machining.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other
required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified. Seal all four
edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 4 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for
hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains
and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and
mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: WI System 5 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applyin g an additional finish coat to
partially fill the wood pores.
5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,
location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level
heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install firerated doors in corresponding firer ated frames according to
NFPA 80.
C. FactoryFitted Doors: Align in frames for unifo rm clearance at each edge.
D. FactoryFinished Doors: Restore finish before i nstallation if fitting or
machining is required at Project site.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 5 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 6 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 1 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of access door and frame indicated.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and
frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. FireRated Access Doors and Frames: Units compl ying with NFPA 80 that
are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest
response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and
labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard
size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 2 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. RolledSteel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, ro lled from plate complying
with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
C. Steel Sheet: electrolytic zinccoated, ASTM A 5 91/A 591M with coldrolled
steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel (CS), exposed.
D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with
SSPCSP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other
contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if
present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCS P 5/NACE No. 1,
"White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPCSP 8, "Pickli ng."
2. BakedEnamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard twocoat, bakedenamel fini sh consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's
written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
E. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299inc h (0.76mm) zinccoated
steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of
gypsum board.
F. Plaster Beads: Casing bead formed from 0.0299i nch (0.76mm) zinccoated
steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit
thickness of plaster.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering firerated products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 3 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firerated
products by one of the following:
1. Design Make: The William Bros. Corporation of America WB FR 800
Series, with automatic closure, smoke seal and mortised lock, or equal.
2. Karp Associates, Inc.
3. Milcor Inc.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide nonrated
products by one of the following:
1. Design Make: The Nystrom Corporation WB FR 800 Series, with
automatic closure, smoke seal and mortised lock, or equal.
2. Karp Associates, Inc.
3. Milcor Inc.
D. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel
sheet.
1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 0.060inch (1.5mm) thick sheet metal, set flush with
exposed face flange of frame.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060inch (1.5mm) Insert dim ension thick sheet
metal with 11/4inch (32mm) wide, surfacemount ed trim.
4. Hinges: Continuous piano.
5. Latch: Slam latch operated by flush key with interior release.
6. Lock: Cylinder.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as
integral units ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use
materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,
or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent
surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to
secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 11/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) wide around
perimeter of frame.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush,
smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 4 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors
and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish
material.
C. Install swingdown hinged doors with hinge close st to an adjacent wall, so
that an open door in a ceiling less than 8’6” AFF, will not interfere with public
egress path and will minimize the likelihood for pedestrian injury. If this is not
possible, coordinate the review with Owner’s Representative, in advance of
rough opening.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
C. Clean dirt and finger prints from exposed finished.
D. Prepare assembly for painting. Prime and paint two finish coats to match
existing conditions. Finish Paint color and type to be determined by Owners
Facilities Department.
END OF SECTION 083113
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 1 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 092216 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes nonloadbearing steel fra ming members for the
following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits,
furring, etc.).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product used, include MSDS as
applicable.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. FireTestResponse Characteristics: For firere sistancerated assemblies
that incorporate nonloadbearing steel framing, pr ovide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STCRated Assemblies: For STCrated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent
testing agency.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NONLOADBEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions
indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for
metal, unless otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 2 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hotdip
galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. AsphaltSaturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Typ e I (No. 15 asphalt
felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesivebacked, closedcell vinyl foam strips that allow
fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick,
in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded
hollowmetal frames, castin anchors, and structura l framing, for compliance
with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and
spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in
ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment
services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with nonloadbearing
steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 3 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar
metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. SingleLayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full
height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except
where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. SlipType Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural
supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent
axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on
door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and
secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a
minimum 1/2inch (12.7mm ) clearance from jamb stud to allow for
installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to
underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the
same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install
framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door
heads.
4. FireResistanceRated Partitions: Install frami ng to comply with fire
resistancerated assembly indicated and support clo sures and to make
partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
5. SoundRated Partitions: Install framing to comp ly with soundrated
assembly indicated.
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces
vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of
adjacent framing.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 4 OF 4
JUNE 29, 2012
END OF SECTION 092216
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 1 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. FireResistanceRated Assemblies: For fireresi stancerated assemblies,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly
indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STCRated Assemblies: For STCrated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent
testing agency.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and
other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more
stringent.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 2 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as
applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more
stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. USG Corporation.
B. Type X:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminumcoated steel s heet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LCBead: Jshaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. LBead: Lshaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. UBead: Jshaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint
compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. CurvedEdge Cornerbead: With notched or flexibl e flanges.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 3 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use
formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or
for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged
surface areas, use settingtype taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use dryingtype, allp urpose compound.
a. Use settingtype compound for installing paperf aced metal trim
accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use dryingtype, al lpurpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use dryingtype, a llpurpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use dryingtype, allpurpose
compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly
adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral
fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. FireResistanceRated Assemblies: Comply with m ineralfiber
requirements of assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded
hollowmetal frames and framing, for compliance wit h requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 4 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at
edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space
between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications
where intermediate supports or gypsum board backbl ocking is provided
behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints
other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining
gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,
or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less
than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside
of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by
structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8inch (6.4 t o 9.5mm) wide joints to
install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to nonloadbearing partitions at
structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2inch (6.4 to 12.7
mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where
edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each
panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STCRated Assemblies: Seal construction at peri meters, behind control
joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters
and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off soundflanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above
acoustical ceilings.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 5 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless
blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: All.
B. SingleLayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application
to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing),
unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresi stancerated assembly,
and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in
alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance rated assembly.
3. On Zfurring members, apply gypsum panels vertic ally (parallel to
framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before
applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same
sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and
offset facelayer joints 1 framing member, 16 inche s (400 mm) minimum,
from parallel baselayer joints, unless otherwise i ndicated or required by
fireresistancerated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located
over stud or furring member and facelayer joints o ffset at least one stud
or furring member with baselayer joints, unless ot herwise indicated or
required by fireresistancerated assembly. Stagge r joints on opposite
sides of partitions.
3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to
supports with screws.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 6 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing
with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.
3. LCBead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. LBead: Use where indicated.
5. UBead: Use at exposed panel edges.
6. CurvedEdge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual
joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having
flanges not intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and
according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other
Division 09 Sections.
3. Level 5: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semigloss or gloss
paint finish.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other
Division 09 Sections.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction
period.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 7 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 1 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 096536 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conductive vinyl composition floor tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts,
edges, columns, doorways, and seaming plan for sheet flooring.
C. Samples for Verification: Fullsize units of each color and pattern of floor
tile required.
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. FireTestResponse Characteristics: As determin ed by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq.
cm.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than
90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 2 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces
to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every building, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed. Deliver to Owner’s field office.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Excelon 51903 Blue Gray.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, throughpattern tile.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches
F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 3 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
2.2 BASE MATERIALS
A. Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset: top set Style
B, Cove and as follows:
1. Height: 6 inch.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from mfg. full range of colors.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
7. Manufacturers: Johnsonite, Inc. or equal.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latexmodified, portland
cement based or blended hydrauliccementbased form ulation provided or
approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
.B. Adhesives: Waterresistant type recommended b y manufacturer to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended
by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere
with adhesion of floor tile.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 4 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling
and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a
uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where
they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products
immediately before installation.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal
width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than
onehalf tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the
same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including builtin furniture, ca binets, pipes, outlets, and
door frames.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 5 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or
marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on
substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive
applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open
cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive
spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Dampmop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other
damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile with Ram Board Protective Card Board secured by
painters tape and one layer of hard board or equal until substantial
completion by Div 23 and Division 27 Contractors.
E. After substantial completion by Division 27 Contractor, but prior to final
project closeout, strip factory wax and burn in two coats of wax. Refer to
Section 01 77 10 Final Cleaning, as applicable.
F. Provide final cleaning – at final acceptance, as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 096536
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 6 OF 6
JUNE 29, 2012
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 1 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 096537 – ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORIN G
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conductive vinyl composition floor tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts,
edges, columns, doorways, and seaming plan for sheet flooring.
C. Samples for Verification: Fullsize units of each color and pattern of floor
tile required.
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. FireTestResponse Characteristics: As determin ed by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq.
cm.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than
90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 2 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces
to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every building, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed. Deliver to Owner’s field office.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Static Dissipative SDT.
B. Provide direct cement application over cured concrete.
C. Electrical Resistance ASTM F 150 25,0001,00 0,000 ohms,.
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Thickness: 0.125 inch
F. Size: 12 by 12 inches
G. Manufacturer: Armstrong
H. Color: Blue/Gray 51903
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 3 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
I. Style: Standard Excelon
2.2 BASE MATERIALS
A. Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset: top set Style
B, Cove and as follows:
1. Height: 6 inch.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from mfg. full range of colors.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
7. Manufacturers: Johnsonite, Inc. or equal.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latexmodified, portland
cement based or blended hydrauliccementbased form ulation provided or
approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. StaticControl Adhesive: Provided or approved b y manufacturer; type that
maintains electrical continuity of floorcovering s ystem to ground
connection.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. VCT Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Public Health’s (formerly, the California
Department of Health Services) “Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
Sources Using Environmental Chambers”.
C. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that
maintains electrical continuity of floorcovering s ystem to ground
connection.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, staticcontr ol liquid floor polish products as
recommended by floorcovering manufacturerer.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 4 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere
with adhesion of floor tile.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling
and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a
uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where
they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products
immediately before installation.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 5 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install staticcontrol resilient flooring accord ing to manufacturer’s written
instructions
B. Embed grounding strips in staticcontr ol adhesive. Extend grounding
strips beyond perimeter of staticcontrol resilient floorcovering surfaces
to ground connections.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit staticcontrol resilient fl ooring to butt neatly and tightly
to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including builtin furniture,
cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
D. Install staticcontrol resilient flooring on cov ers for telephone and
electrical ducts, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall
continuity of color and pattern with pieces of staticcontrol resilient flooring
installed on covers. Tightly adhere staticcontrol resilient flooring edges
to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
E. Adhere staticcontrol resilient flooring to subs trates using a full spread of
staticcontrol adhesive applied to substrate to pro duce a completed
installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Dampmop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other
damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile with Ram Board Protective Card Board secured by
painters tape and one layer of hard board or equal until substantial
completion by Div 23 and Division 27 Contractors.
E. After substantial completion by Division 27 Contractor, but prior to final
project closeout. If recommended in writing by manufacturer, apply
protective staticcontrol floor polish formulated t o maintain or enhance
floor covering's electrical properties; ensure staticcontrol resilient flooring
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 6 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
surfaces are free from soil, staticcontrol adhesiv e, and surface
blemishes. Do not apply standard wax.
a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved
by manufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film
that reduces staticcontrol resilient flooring's ef fectiveness for static
control.
F. Provide final cleaning – at final acceptance, as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 096536
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 7 OF 7
JUNE 29, 2012
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 1 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division01 General Re quirements
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on the following interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Clay masonry.
3. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
4. Steel.
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
7. Plaster.
8. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
9. Cotton or canvas insulation covering.
10. Galvanized metal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product used, include MSDS as
applicable.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI
Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint
systems indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 2 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in wellventilated
areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45
deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or
wet surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. SherwinWilliams Company (The).
3. Tamms Industries, Inc.
4. ChemRex.
5. AntiStatic Industries
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible
with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service
and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and
field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in
writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on
substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 3 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2.5 LATEX PAINTS
A. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MP I #145 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.
B. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): M PI #147 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.
2.6 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.
2.7 INTERIOR ALKYD DRY FOG/FALL: MPI #55.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an
electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 4 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates
indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size
or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protecti on before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surfaceapplied
protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including
dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible
primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds,
efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or
alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint
surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinities of mortar joints to be
painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
H. GalvanizedMetal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from
galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to
produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently
applied paints.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 5 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
I. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying
primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty
or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing
compound is dry and sanded smooth.
K. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured
and dry.
L. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
M. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and
other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers,
and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats
until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and
refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 6 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
3.5 PAINTING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL and COMMUNICATION WORK:
A. Paint items exposed in equipment rooms, new Telecommunication
Rooms and other occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Architectural Work:
a. Newly exposed, existing wall and existing deck surfaces in each
new Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint,
EVEN if not called for on the drawings.
b. All existing and new wall surfaces in each new
Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint,
EVEN if not called for on the drawings.
c. All existing and new suspended ceiling surfaces in each new
Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint,
EVEN if not called for on the drawings.
2. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas
insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factoryprimed finish
for field painting.
f. Paint new and existing exposed duct occurring in new
Telecommunication Rooms, even if not indicated on the AMEP
plans. Clean and prime existing as called for.
3. Electrical and Communication Work:
a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factoryprimed finish
for field painting.
b. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished
areas.
c. Paint new and existing: exposed electrical, exposed communication
conduit exposed plywood and exposed electrical equipment occurring
in new Telecommunication Rooms, even if not indicated on the AMEP
plans. Clean and prime existing as called for.
B. Paint shopprimed equipment.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical
and electrical components and paint separately.
D. Prime and paint interior and exterior insulated and exposed pipes, conduit,
boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports,
except where items are prefinished.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 7 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
E. Exposed Conduit, Surface Mounted Boxes, Exposed Pullboxes, Exposed
Cable Tray and raceways: As called for on the Drawings.
F. Refer to Telecommunications drawings for additional specifics of painting of
conduits, cable trays and telecom equipment.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. WaterBased Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 3.1M.
a. Prime Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior late x (eggshell).
C. ClayMasonry Substrates:
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 4.1M.
a. Prime Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell).
D. CMU Substrates:
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 4.2E.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell).
E. Steel Substrates:
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 5.1S.
a. Prime Coat: Rustinhibitive primer (water based ).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 8 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (semigloss).
F. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood.
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 6.4T.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latexbased wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell).
G. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell).
H. Plaster Substrates:
1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell).
I. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quickdrying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
J. Cotton or Canvas InsulationCovering Substrates: Including pipe and duct
coverings.
1. Latex System: MPI INT 10.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell).
K. Exposed Structural Ceilings Ferrous and Galvanized Metal:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 9 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
1. Waterborne Acrylic Coating, Flat Finish with flash rust resistance and
low odor (White or Black only).
a. Primer: SW Kem Bond HS on Steel if not factory pr imed.
b. First Coat: SW Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall (B42).
c. Second Coat: SW Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall (B42).
L. Ferrous Metal:
1. SemiGloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two coats ove r primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 2.5 mils/coat.
a. Primer Coat: SW Kem Kromik Universal Primer (B 50Z).
b. First Coat: SW DTM Acrylic Enamel (B66100).
c. Second Coat: SW DTM Acrylic Enamel (B66100).
END OF SECTION 099123
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 10 OF 10
JUNE 29, 2012
[ THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
SECTION 102213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. As defined in ASTM E 2016:
1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent
wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra
crimps between the intersections.
2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires
securely in place.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design wire mesh units, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
1. Include clearances required for operation of doors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code Steel ."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel ."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels
and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and
Projectsite storage. Use vented plastic.
B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure
lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic
installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous
with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acorn Wire & Iron Works, Inc.
2. American Woven Wire Corporation.
3. California Wire Products Corporation.
4. Central Wire and Iron.
5. Donaldson, R. J., Inc.
6. Folding Guard Corporation.
7. GS Company (The).
8. Indiana Wire Products, Inc.
9. Jesco Industries, Inc.
10. Kenco Wire and Iron Products Inc.
11. Kentucky Metal Products Co.
12. King Wire Partitions, Inc.
13. Lakeside Wire and Iron Company.
14. Miller Wire Works, Inc.
15. Newark Wire Works Inc.
16. Standard Wire & Steel Works.
17. Wire Crafters, LLC.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. ColdRolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, C ommercial Steel (CS),
Type B.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
E. Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, coldformed str ucturalsteel tubing.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
F. MetallicCoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zincironalloy
(galvannealed) coating designation.
G. PaneltoPanel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standa rd steel bolts, nuts, and
washers.
H. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure,
load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5
(0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2
(ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4), for bolts and nuts;
ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.
3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed.
4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed.
I. PowerActuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated and fabricated from corrosionresistant materials; with
clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by wire mesh construction, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
J. Universal Shop Primer: Fastcuring, lead and c hromatefree, universal
modifiedalkyd primer, complying with MPI#79.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from
zincrich primer.
2.3 STANDARDDUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
A. Mesh: 0.135inch (3.5mm) diameter, intermedi atecrimp steel wire woven
into 11/2inch (38mm) diamond mesh.
B. Vertical Panel Framing: 11/4by5/8by0.097i nch (32by16by2.5mm)
coldrolled, Cshaped steel channels with 1/4inch (6mm) diameter bolt
holes spaced not more than 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. along center of framing.
C. Horizontal Panel Framing: 1by1/2by1/8inch (25by13by3mm) cold
rolled steel channels.
D. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 coldrolled stee l channels, not less than 1 by
3/8 by 1/8 inch (25 by 9.5 by 3 mm), bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh
or 1by1/2by1/8inch (25by13by3mm) coldrol led steel channels with
wire woven through.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
E. Top Capping Bars: 21/4by1inch (57by25mm) coldrolled steel channels.
F. Line Posts: 3inchby4.1lb (76mmby1.9kg) or 31/2by11/4by0.127
inch (89by32by3.2mm) steel channels; with 5by 18by1/4inch (125by
450by6mm) steel base plates punched for attachme nt to floor.
G. Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches (50
mm) high; sized to suit vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and
with set screws for leveling adjustment.
H. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing
fabricated from 11/4by1/2by1/8inch (32by13 by3mm) steel channels
or Cchannels, banded with 11/4by1/8inch (32by 3mm) flat steel bar
cover plates on [3] [4] sides, and with 1/8inch (3mm) thick angle str ike bar
and cover on strike jamb.
1. Hinges: Fullsurface type, 3by3inch (76by 76mm) steel, 11/2 pairs
per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing.
2. Padlock Lug: Mortised into door framing and enclosed with steel cover.
3. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with manufacturer's standard cylinder;
operated by key outside and recessed turn knob inside.
I. Accessories:
1. Sheet Metal Base: Not less than 0.060inch (1.5mm) thick, coldrolled
steel sheet.
2. Adjustable Filler Panels: Not less than 0.060i nch (1.5mm) thick, cold
rolled steel sheet; capable of filling openings from 2 to 12 inches (50 to
300 mm).
3. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, coldrolle d steel sheet; allowing up
to 1 inch (25 mm) of adjustment.
J. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Bakedenamel finish unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than
those indicated. Use largersized components as re commended by wire
mesh item manufacturer. As required for complete installation, provide bolts,
hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes.
1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled.
2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no
evidence of joint.
B. StandardDuty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate w ire mesh partitions with
cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of
cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing.
2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction.
a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition
manufacturer. Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing.
b. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting
adjacent panels.
3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with 3 inches (76 mm) of clear space
between finished floor and bottom horizontal framing.
4. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with
finished floor.
5. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels.
a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom
over door, fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels.
6. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing
as required to install hardware.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hotdip galvanize items as indicat ed to comply with applicable
standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron components.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
3. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean wire
mesh components of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and
treat with metallicphosphate process.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrousmetal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
metal fabrications:
1. Ineriors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC_SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,
except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete
or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPCPA 1, "Paint
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
D. BakedEnamel or PowderCoat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and
pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2coat, bakedon finish, suitable
for use indicated, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a
minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.
C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support
fasteners.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION
A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8in ch (9.5mm) diameter,
postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through anchor
clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as required to
achieve level and plumb installation.
1. Anchors may be set with poweractuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8in ch (9.5mm) diameter,
postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor
shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in
floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation.
1. Anchors may be set with poweractuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back
corner panel framing and as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilledin expansion
shields and hanger or lag bolts.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS JUNE 29, 2012
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing
members.
4. For steelframed gypsum board assemblies, use ha nger or lag bolts set
into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to
locate backing members.
5. For steelframed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to
steel framing or concealed reinforcements using selftapping screws of
size and type required to support structural loads.
D. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4inch (6mm)
diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c.
E. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows:
1. On each side of sliding door openings.
2. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet (2.1 to 2.7 m) high, spaced at 15 to 20
feet (4.6 to 6.1 m) o.c.
3. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet (3.0 to 3.7 m) high, located between
every other panel.
4. For partitions that are more than 12 feet (3.7 m) high, located between
each panel.
F. Where standardwidth wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of
run, provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.
G. Install doors complete with door hardware.
H. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.
Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage
accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are
warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPCPA 1 for
touching up shoppainted surfaces.
D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 102213